JP2021069799A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: A main control device of a Pachinko machine executes a winning/losing lottery on the basis of entry into an operation hole provided in a game area. As support modes by an electric accessory attached to a second operation hole, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are provided. When a jackpot occurs in a normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, control is shifted to a first particular game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode through a jackpot game state. The first particular game state is a game state limited to one game round, and control is shifted to a second particular game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode on the basis of occurrence of V winning during a special winning game state when a special winning result occurs in the game round. After a game round resulting in winning during the second particular game state is started, winning prior occurrence display is executed on the basis of the fact that a retention number pertaining to the second operation port reaches the upper limit.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 75

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some game machines such as pachinko machines include a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When the game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention
It is a game machine provided with a game board in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area.
The starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry into the starting ball entry section, and
A special information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a special information storage means.
A special information determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information,
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the game rotation operation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. Is completed as one game time, and the game time control means for controlling the notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. When,
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result corresponding to the special determination information, and the gaming state is based on the fact that the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Is provided with a special game state transition means for shifting from a predetermined game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The number of special information stored in the special information storage means can be stored in the special information storage means under the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that results in the winning is performed in the second game state. When the upper limit is reached, as a notification result corresponding to the winning result, a suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the player will shift to the special gaming state before the game rotation operation is completed is provided. It is characterized by being.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. (A) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the game times. (A) is a schematic view of the second operating port in the closed state, and (b) is a schematic view of the second operating port in the open state. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the closed state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device in the open state. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view seen from the side surface side of the second variable winning device, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view seen from the back side of the second variable winning device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a hit / fail table for the first operating port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a hit / fail table for the second operating port. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type table for the first operating port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type table for the second operating port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the jackpot type and the number of time reductions. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a special hit type table for the first operating port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of a special hit type table for the second operating port. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the type of V jackpot, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of V jackpot and the number of time reductions. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a low-frequency winning mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a high-frequency winning mode. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for confirmation display. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process to a special hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing process for a special hit. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of a special hit game. It is a flowchart which shows the V distribution setting process. It is a flowchart which shows V prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process to the jackpot game state. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of a jackpot game state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for termination of a high frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the support mode and the variable display mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram comparing the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode. It is the schematic which illustrated the flow of a game. It is the schematic which illustrated the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the stay mode with the progress of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the stay mode with the progress of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the special ending process which is executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of right-handed notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 1st special effect mode executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge production progress processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the first half part. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process to the latter half part. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-confirmation process for the 1st operation port executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-confirmation process for the 2nd operation port executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit count calculation process. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the hold information and the number of consecutive hits. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the hold information and the number of consecutive hits. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the hold information and the number of consecutive hits. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for the latter half part. It is a flowchart which shows the processing for a deviation result. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the production in the case of a deviation result. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a hit result. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the production in the case of a hit result. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the production in the case of a hit result. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a hit result executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the difference of right-handed notification. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge production progress processing executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge production end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a jackpot game state executed by the MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a right-handed notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the difference of right-handed notification. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the difference between the variation display mode of the symbol in the 1st variation display mode and the variation display mode of the symbol in the 2nd special variation display mode in the 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notification processing corresponding to the 2nd special effect mode executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of advance notification. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. Note that in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is not shown.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with one of the left and right side portions as the support side.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip. The locking device 16 has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and also locks the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. It has a function. Each locked state is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

The front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel 62 may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window 61. A display light emitting unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game situation are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66, which bulge toward the front side, are arranged vertically. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 96 provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the launch handle 60, the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53 provided below the game area PE in the inner frame 13 toward the game area PE. In this case, by changing the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 60, the launch intensity of the game ball launched toward the game area PE, that is, the launch momentum is changed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the launching handle 60 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area PE every 0.6 sec. To.

The game area PE is formed on the game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

The game board 24 is attached with an inner rail portion and an outer rail portion so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE, and is partitioned by the inner rail portion and the outer rail portion. The game area PE is formed. Further, the inner rail portion and the outer rail portion constitute a guide rail 54 for the game ball to the game area PE, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53 by the player rotating the launch handle 60 is , The guide rail 54 guides the player to the upper part of the game area PE.

The guide rail 54 is formed so that its outlet portion faces the upper center of the game area PE on one side of the game area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE is from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is formed to the opposite side. It shifts to the side of the side. The outlet portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side portion of the game area PE.

In the range defined as the game area PE in the game board 24, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a first variable winning device 32A, a second variable winning device 32B, a first operating port (or a first starting ball entry) 33, a second operating port (or a second starting ball). A unit) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a working port display unit 43 as a main display unit, a through gate display unit 44 as an accessory display unit, and the like are provided. A plurality of general winning openings 31 are provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are used. The payout is executed. Specifically, when a ball enters the first operating port 33, four payouts are executed, and when a ball enters the second operating port 34, one payout is executed. , When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out. Further, when a ball is entered into the first variable winning device 32A, 15 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the second variable winning device 32B, three prize balls are paid out. Is paid out.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same, or the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same. The number of prize balls according to the above may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33. Further, the number of prize balls related to the first variable winning device 32A may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like. Further, the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B may have the same number of prize balls, or the latter may have a larger number of prize balls than the former.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. Even if a game ball enters the out opening 37, the prize ball is not paid out. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not discharged. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out opening 37, the general winning opening 31, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the first operating port 33, The entry of a game ball into the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is also referred to as a prize.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the peripheral portion (center frame 36a) of the variable display unit 36 projecting forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, there is an area where the game ball launched into the game area PE can flow down. It is partitioned. Specifically, in the game area PE, the upper region PE1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PE1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and the variable display unit 36. The left region PE2, which is the left region, the right region PE3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PE1, and the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided into a lower region PE4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

Which region of each of these regions PE1 to PE4 flows down (passes) is determined by the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 60, that is, the launching force of the game ball. Specifically, when the player performs the rotation operation of the launch handle 60 as the first launch operation with the rotation operation amount in the first range which is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and less than the reference rotation amount. The launched game ball is likely to be launched to the left of the lateral center position in the upper region PE1. In this case, the game ball flows down the game area PE in the order of the upper area PE1 → the left side area PE2 → the lower area PE4.

On the other hand, when the player performs the rotation operation of the launch handle 60 with the rotation operation amount in the second range which is equal to or more than the reference rotation amount as the second launch operation, the launched game ball is in the upper region PE1. It is easier to launch to the right than the center position in the horizontal direction. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the right region PE3 → the lower region PE4. That is, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the launch handle 60, whether the game ball plays on the left route flowing down the left region PE2 or the game ball plays on the right route flowing down the right region PE3. , It is possible for the player to select.

The reference rotation amount is a rotation operation amount at which the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left region PE2 and the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right region PE3 are the same or substantially the same, and the predetermined rotation amount. Is the amount of rotation operation that enables the launched game ball to pass through the guide rail 54 and enter the game area PE. In the rotation operation amount in the first range, the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left side region PE2 is high, and in the rotation operation amount in the second range, the ratio of the game ball flowing down in the right side region PE3 is high.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower region PE4. The first operating port 33 is opened upward, and no member for opening and closing is provided. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. Further, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and is a game ball that has flowed into the stage 36b through the guidance passage formed in the variable display unit 36. The game ball discharged from the center of the stage 36b to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily win a prize in the first operating port 33. The first operating port 33 is provided with a winning sensor 33a for the first operating port, and the winning sensor 33a for the first operating port detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first operating port 33.

Here, with respect to the first operating port 33, the game ball flowing down the left route can win (reachable), and the game ball flowing down the right route does not win (does not reach). That is, the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 38 in the left side region PE2, the right side region PE3, and the lower side region PE4 is configured to allow the game ball flowing down the left side region PE2 to reach the first operating port 33. On the other hand, it is configured so as not to allow the game ball flowing down the right side region PE3 to reach the first operating port 33. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the first operating port 33, the game ball is fired so as to flow down the left route to play the game.

The second operating port 34 is installed in the right region PE3. The configuration of the second operating port 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (a) and 5 (b) are schematic views showing the configuration of the second operating port 34.

The second operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 34a is connected to a drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the drive unit 34b to be in the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) shown in FIG. 5 (a). And the open state (support state or guide state) shown in FIG. 5 (b). When the electric accessory 34a is closed, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is opened, the second operating port 34 can be won. By the way, when it is in the open state, the electric accessory 34a protrudes toward the game area PE side and guides the winning of the second operating port 34. The second operating port 34 is provided with a winning sensor 34c for the second operating port, and the winning sensor 34c for the second operating port detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second operating port 34.

The electric accessory 34a is switched between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the second operating port 34 and a state in which winning is more difficult to occur than in a state in which winning is not impossible but the above-mentioned winning is likely to occur. It may be configured to be. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be moved or rotated in the front-rear direction to switch between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur.

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes having different modes of support by the electric accessory 34a are set. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a is opened per unit time is compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner. The low frequency support mode (or low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (or high frequency guide state) are set so that the period of relatively high and low and / or the open state is relatively long and short. It is set.

In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Then, when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the ball.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 35 is provided above (upstream side) of the second operating port 34 in the right region PE3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PE after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34. A detection sensor 35a is provided in the through gate 35, and the detection sensor 35a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the through gate 35.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and the result of the internal lottery is an opening result (support winning), and a pattern corresponding to the result is displayed by the through gate display unit 44 described later. The accessory opening / closing game (support execution mode) is executed when the variable display of the pattern is completed so as to be stopped and displayed (after the final display is confirmed in detail). In the accessory opening / closing game, the electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined mode.

When the launch handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2, the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 cannot be won, and the game ball passes through the right side region PE3. If the launch handle 60 is operated so as to flow down, a prize can be won. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35, the game ball is launched so as to flow down the right route to play the game.

In the lower region PE4, the first variable winning device 32A is arranged below the first operating port 33. The configuration of the first variable winning device 32A will be described with reference to FIG.

The first variable winning device 32A includes a first large winning opening 321 that opens in front of the pachinko machine 10, and an opening / closing door 322 that opens and closes the first large winning opening 321. The first large winning opening 321 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size capable of winning a plurality of game balls at the same time. The first large winning opening 321 communicates with the guide passage 324 provided on the back side of the game board 24, and all the game balls that have won the first large winning opening 321 are guided to the guide passage 324. ing. The guide passage 324 is provided with a first large winning opening detection sensor 325 that detects the passage of the game ball, and the first large winning opening detection sensor 325 allows the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 321. Winning is detected.

Further, the first variable winning device 32A is provided with a drive unit 323 for driving the opening / closing door 322. The opening / closing door 322 is driven by a drive unit 323 through a link mechanism (not shown) to enable a game ball to win a prize in the first large winning opening 321 (FIG. 6 (b)) and the first large winning opening. At 321 the game ball is switched to the closed state (FIG. 6 (a)) in which the game ball cannot win a prize.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary that when the first variable winning device 32A (opening / closing door 322) is closed, it is not possible to win a prize in the first large winning opening 321. It may be configured so that a prize can be won. In short, it suffices that the ease of winning the first large winning opening 321 differs between the open state and the closed state.

Here, for the first variable winning device 32A, the first variable winning is possible so that the gaming ball can be won only when the firing handle 60 is operated so that the gaming ball flows down the right region PE3. The arrangement of the nail 38 and the game component in the peripheral portion of the device 32A is set. Therefore, when the player aims to win a prize in the first variable winning device 32A, the game ball is fired so as to flow down the right route to play the game.

As shown in FIG. 4, a second variable winning device 32B is arranged diagonally downward to the right (downstream side of the second operating port 34) of the variable display unit 36 in the right region PE3. The configuration of the second variable winning device 32B will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the second variable winning device 32B includes a second large winning opening 351 that opens in front of the pachinko machine 10, and an opening / closing door 352 that opens and closes the second large winning opening 351. There is. The second variable winning device 32B is provided with a drive unit 353 that drives the opening / closing door 352. The opening / closing door 352 is driven by a drive unit 353 through a link mechanism (not shown) so that the game ball can win the second prize opening 351 and the game ball cannot win the second prize opening 351. It is switched to the closed state.

It should be noted that it is not always necessary that when the second variable winning device 32B (opening / closing door 352) is closed, it is not impossible to win the second large winning opening 351 and it is difficult to win the prize compared to the open state. It may be configured so that a prize can be won. In short, it suffices if the ease of winning the second large winning opening 351 differs between the open state and the closed state.

The second large winning opening 351 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a size that allows a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The second major winning opening 351 communicates with the guide passage 354 provided on the back side of the game board 24, and all the game balls that have won the second major winning opening 351 are guided to the guide passage 354. ing.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the guide passage 354 is bifurcated from the intermediate position, and constitutes an upstream region 355 constituting the upstream side of the branch position and one of the downstream sides of the branch position. The V winning area (or used area) 356 and the discharging area (or unused area) 357 constituting the other downstream side of the branch position are provided. Further, at the branch position, a distribution member 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing the game ball that has reached the branch position from the upstream region 355 to either the V winning region 356 or the discharge region 357. When the distribution member 358 is not driven by the distribution drive unit 359, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 357, and the distribution member 358 is driven by the drive unit 359. In this state, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 356.

In the upstream region 355 of the guide passage 354, a detection sensor 361 for counting is provided so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball flowing into the upstream region 355 always passes. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the counting detection sensor 361, the prize ball corresponding to the winning of the second variable winning device 32B is paid out. Further, in the V winning area 356, a detection sensor 362 for V winning is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball flowing into the V winning area 356 always passes. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 362 for V winning, a V jackpot is generated. The details of the V jackpot will be described later.

Further, the discharge detection sensor 363 is provided in the discharge region 357 so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the discharge region 357 always passes. Based on the detection result by the discharge detection sensor 363 and the detection result by the V winning detection sensor 362, whether or not the game ball remains in the second variable winning device 32B, and whether or not the game ball remains in the second variable winning device 32B, and the second variable winning device 32B It is determined whether or not the number of prizes and the number of discharges from the second variable winning device 32B match.

The drive unit 359 is periodically driven and controlled from a predetermined timing. Specifically, the drive unit 359 for the distribution member is driven and controlled at a predetermined cycle from the start timing of the open / close execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened. As a result, the timing at which the game ball winning the second variable winning device 32B is distributed to the V winning area 356 side and the timing at which the game ball is distributed to the discharging area 357 side are periodically switched.

In the opening / closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened, a plurality of opening / closing execution modes having different periods in which the opening / closing door 352 is in the open state are set. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the probability that the winning game ball will be distributed to the V winning area 356 is relatively high or low by differentiating the period during which the opening / closing door 352 is opened. Has been done. Hereinafter, the opening mode on the side with a high probability of being distributed to the V winning area 356 is referred to as a high-frequency winning mode (high expectation mode), and the opening mode on the side with a low probability is referred to as a low-frequency winning mode (low expectation mode). That is.

It should be noted that the total probability that the game ball passes through the V winning area 356 in the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode and the opening / closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode in which the game ball can win the second variable winning device 32B. Is set to be less than or equal to a predetermined probability (1/10). That is, although the probability of passing through the V winning area 356 in the opening / closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode is increased, when combined with the probability of passing through the V winning area 356 in the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode. The winning rate to the second variable winning device 32B, the passing rate of the V winning area 356, and the second variable winning device 32B in the open / close execution mode of the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode so as to be less than a predetermined probability. The distribution ratio of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode when the opening / closing execution mode of is executed is set.

The second variable winning device 32B is preferably formed so that it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether the winning game ball is distributed to the V winning area 356 or the discharging area 357. Specifically, it is preferable that the front surface side of the second variable winning device 32B is formed to be colored transparent or colorless and transparent.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32A is a variable winning device that is opened and closed when the opening / closing execution mode (big hit gaming state) corresponding to the big hit is executed. The jackpot game state is a mode in which the transition is made when a jackpot is won. In the jackpot game state, the opening time of the first variable winning device 32A reaches a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the first variable winning is achieved. The first variable winning device 32A is repeatedly opened up to a plurality of rounds, with a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls winning in the device 32A (first large winning opening 321) as one round. There is.

On the other hand, the second variable winning device 32B is a variable winning device that is opened and closed when the opening / closing execution mode (special hit gaming state) corresponding to the special hit is executed. The special hit game state is a mode in which the transition is made when a special hit is won. In the special hit game state, the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B reaches a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 sec). Alternatively, one round is defined as a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls winning in the second variable winning device 32B (second large winning opening 351), and the round game is executed only once. ..

In the round game in the jackpot game state and the special hit game state, even if the upper limit opening time and the end condition of the upper limit winning number are not satisfied, the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable for a predetermined number of times and period. It is configured to end when the winning device 32B is opened.

When a prize is won in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, an internal lottery (a lottery for whether or not a big hit is won, a lottery for whether or not a special hit is won) is performed. Then, if the lottery is won, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode in which the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B can be won.

As shown in FIG. 4, the operating port display unit 43 and the through gate display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 extends forward from the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. Specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further with the window panel 62. The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

In order to clearly indicate the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing execution mode is set (or the opening / closing execution mode is set) by winning a big hit in the internal lottery on the operation port display unit 43. The round display unit RS is provided. The round display unit RS starts displaying the number of round games when the open / close execution mode starts, and ends the display when the open / close execution mode ends.

Further, the operation port display unit 43 has a first operation port display unit AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34. A display unit BS for a second operating port is set to clearly indicate the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning prize.

In the display unit AS for the first operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 33. The pattern corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is stopped and displayed (confirmed). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the pattern corresponding to the winning result on the display unit AS for the first operating port ( After the predetermined winning pattern) is stopped and displayed (confirmed), the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the display unit BS for the second operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the second operating port 34. The pattern corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is stopped and displayed (confirmed). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the pattern corresponding to the winning result on the display unit BS for the second operating port ( After the predetermined winning pattern) is stopped and displayed (confirmed), the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the pattern that is variablely displayed when the first operating port 33 is won and the pattern that is changed and displayed when the second operating port 34 is won, the former is referred to as the first special symbol. Alternatively, it may be referred to as a first special figure, and the latter may be referred to as a second special symbol or a second special figure.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variable display of the pattern is started on the corresponding display unit AS for the first operating port and the display unit BS for the second operating port, and the winning is won. The pattern corresponding to the lottery result based on the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the period until the stop display is completed corresponds to one game. The game times will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 4 (b).

In the game round on the operation port display unit 43, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the winning / losing lottery, and then the variable display is confirmed and displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery. It is to be done once. That is, the game times consist of a variable display of the pattern and a definite display of the variable display of the pattern. The term "confirmed" is based on the fact that the above-mentioned stop display is performed assuming that the display content (picture) is unchanged and a definite stop result is displayed.

Here, the final display of the pattern is not completed by the end of the variable display, but is completed by the continuous display of the pattern in the mode corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery over a predetermined final display time. This is for clarifying the boundary with the subsequent game times while ensuring the time for the player to recognize the game result. Therefore, the next game round (variable display) is started after the variable display of the pattern is started after the variable display time has elapsed and the final display time has further elapsed. In the following, the total period of the variable display time and the confirmed display time, that is, the period from the start of the variable display of the pattern in the current game time to the start of the variable display of the pattern in the next game time is the game time. There is an execution period of.

The through-gate display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through-gate 35. In this case, the through-gate display unit 44 performs variable display of the pattern triggered by winning the through-gate 35, and the pattern corresponding to the lottery result based on the winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). The result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 will be specified.

In addition, also in the game times related to the through gate display unit 44, as in the game times related to the operation port display unit 43 shown in FIG. 4 (b), the variation display of the pattern is based on the winning / failing lottery. Is started, and then the variablely displayed pattern is confirmed and displayed once in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery.

If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the support state for opening the electric accessory 34a, the through gate display unit 44 corresponds to the winning result. After the pattern (predetermined winning pattern) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the game shifts to the character opening / closing game. In the accessory opening / closing game, the opening / closing control (switching control) in which the electric accessory 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state and then in the closed state is executed at least once. In the accessory opening / closing game, when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 6 sec) after shifting to the game, or when a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are won in the second operating port 34. It is configured to end in. In addition, even if the end conditions of the upper limit opening time and the upper limit winning number are not satisfied, the accessory opening / closing game is terminated when the electric accessory 34a is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period. It is configured.

The operation port display unit 43 and the through gate display unit 44 are composed of a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device can be used. May be good.

Next, the variable display unit 36 will be described. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variable display (or variable display or switching display) of a symbol which is a kind of symbol.

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed on the operation port display unit 43, the variable display is also performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the case of shifting to the jackpot game state in which the first big winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is opened, the symbol display device 41 has a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line. Is stopped and displayed.

Further, the symbol display device 41 is subjected to hold display corresponding to the display unit AS for the first operating port and the display unit BS for the second operating port. The number of game balls winning in the first operating port 33 is reserved up to four, and the number of winning games in the second operating opening 34 is reserved up to four. In the above-mentioned hold display, a predetermined hold image is displayed, and the number of holds for each of the operating ports 33 and 34 is indicated by the number of the displayed images. The number of holdings is not limited to that shown by the holding image, and may be shown by numerical display. Further, the configuration is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be indicated by, for example, a display unit or a light emitting unit (holding lamp unit) provided on the game board 24.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and a notification / effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 83 made of the above. The substrate box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut off when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling treatment.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box connecting portion 85, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed so that it cannot be opened and is connected to the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box joint 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint 85 Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of the opening of the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling pieces 86 and the coupling pieces 87 form a substrate box 83 and a mounting base. The join process is performed between.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The notification / effect control device 82 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the notification / effect control board is made of a transparent resin. It is housed in a substrate box 84 made of a material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92, a discharge passage board 88, and a control device collecting unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the notification / effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. Have.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the amusement park are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 is provided with an output terminal for outputting a signal when the number of game balls is insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. An output terminal for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state) is provided. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The discharge passage board 88 is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 93, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 93. The game balls that have won the various winning openings 31, 33, 34, 321 and 351 and the game balls that have entered the out opening 37 are led out to the discharge passage on the back side of the game board 24. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game ball led out to the discharge passage is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device collective unit 93 has a horizontally long mounting base, and the payout control device 97 and the power supply / emission control device 98 are mounted on the mounting base. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply / launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply / launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and is further produced by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the launch handle 60. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111. The MPU 112 is a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 112, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 113 is executed. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 113 and the RAM 114 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 112, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of the control device other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 115 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, a power supply / emission control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power failure monitoring board 115.

Further, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. Various sensors include a general winning opening 31, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a first variable winning device 32A, and a second variable winning device 32B. Sensor 31a, first operating port winning sensor 33a, second operating port winning sensor 34c, through winning sensor 35a, first large winning opening detection sensor 325, detection sensor 361, V winning area 356, for discharge Detection sensors 362, 363 and the like for detecting the inflow of game balls into the area 357 are provided. Based on the detection results of these various sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 325, 361-363, the MPU 112 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 112, various lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, a notification / effect control device 82, and the like are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. The payout control device 97 outputs, for example, a prize ball command based on a winning determination result to the prize ball corresponding entry unit corresponding to the payout of the prize ball.

Various commands for effect are output to the notification / effect control device 82. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the notification / effect control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

Further, an electric accessory drive unit 34b and a drive unit 323, 353, 359 for a variable winning device are connected to the output side of the MPU 112 as various drive units. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 111, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the open / close execution mode (big hit game state or special hit game state) occurs, the open / close door 322 of the first variable winning device 32A, the open / close door 352 of the second variable winning device 32B, and the distribution member Drive control of the drive units 323, 353, 359 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the 358 is driven. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 112 so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, at the time of the game rounds related to the respective operating ports 33 and 34, the display control of the first operating port display unit AS or the second operating port display unit BS in the operating port display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 112, and the display control is executed. In the jackpot game, the display control of the round display unit RS in the operation port display unit 43 is executed. Then, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the through gate display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 112.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112, and through this external output terminal 99, the management control device (hall computer) on the game hall side is provided with information on entering various ball-entry units, jackpots, etc. Information about the lottery result is output. This makes it possible to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like with the hall computer.

The power failure monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power supply / emission control device 98, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply / launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied. By the way, the power supply / emission control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is mainly used. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

Further, the power supply / launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied. In this case, the game ball launch mechanism 53 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 54 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device for supplying the game ball stored in the upper plate 71 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is equipped with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 54 toward the guide rail 54, and the game ball is generated by supplying a drive signal from the power supply / launch control device 98 to the solenoid. Be fired.

The notification / effect control device 82 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. It is a thing.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 241 provided in the notification / effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command is received. In addition, it receives game times control commands (game times control information) such as fluctuation start commands, type commands, and fluctuation end commands. It also receives open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as open command, close command, opening command, and ending command.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81. The received command is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242. Then, processing such as analyzing the stored command is performed, and various effects are executed. The ROM 243 of the MPU 242 is provided with various table storage areas, and the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 is provided with various flag storage areas and various counter areas. When performing various effects, processing using these areas is provided. It is possible to do.

A display light emitting unit 63 and a speaker unit 64 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242, and a display control device 212 is connected to the output side.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are combined into a chip MPU 272, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277, respectively. There is.

The MPU272 is a command for holding display control (information for holding display control) for performing hold display control and a command for game time control (information for game time control) for performing variable display of symbols from the notification / effect control device 82. ), Receives open / close execution mode commands (information for open / close execution mode) for displaying moving images in open / close execution mode. Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 275 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 272 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 272. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 274.

The VDP275 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP275 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timings of the MPU 272, the video RAM 277, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 277 from the character ROM 276 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 276 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 276 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 276. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 is stored in the character ROM 276.

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 277.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (j), a design which is a kind of design consists of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done.

Five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variable display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the jackpot result.

Here, the variation display of each symbol sequence will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. When the game round is started, the high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 11A, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol displayed in the variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 11B, the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11C, the variable display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends. After the end of the fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a stop display period is provided in which the stop display is maintained and waits for a predetermined period.

By the way, in the game machine, when the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, the symbol in the final stop row (middle symbol row Z2 in the present embodiment) is not stopped suddenly, but is gradually reduced while reducing the variable display speed. It is common to stop at. In this case, if the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) is configured to start stopping at the start of the confirmation display on the operation port display unit 43, the deceleration time required for the symbol to stop is required, and the symbol is displayed. The time in the stopped state is shortened, which leads to a substantial reduction in the stop display time.

Therefore, before the start of the confirmation display on the operation port display unit 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the confirmation display on the operation port display unit 43 is performed. It is configured so that the temporarily stopped symbol is finally stopped (confirmed display) according to the start timing of. The display mode of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop is different from that in the definite display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates and finely moves, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus (see FIG. 9) constituting the main symbol or the sub symbol is moving. In other words, the temporary stop is performed so as to maintain an incomplete stopped state, although the design seems to be stopped at first glance (stop display). On the other hand, the confirmation display is performed so that the reciprocating fine movement and the movement of the character are not performed and the character is completely stopped.

The temporary stop display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 starts with the result of the winning / failing lottery or the stop result corresponding to the jackpot type, and then shifts to the confirmed display as it is, and the stop does not correspond to the winning / failing lottery result or the jackpot type. After the stop display is temporarily displayed as a result, the stop result may be changed to the stop result corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery through the re-variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and then the display may shift to the final display.

By the way, in the game round executed by the display unit 43 for the operation port, the temporary stop display of the pattern is not performed, and the variable display pattern is suddenly stopped according to the passage of the variable display time, and the state (the pattern is stopped). The displayed state) is maintained until the confirmed display time elapses. That is, the stop display of the pattern on the operation port display unit 43 becomes a definite display as it is. This also applies to the game times executed by the through-gate display unit 44.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, and includes the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and so on. The combination of symbols corresponding to big hits and misses can be changed as appropriate.

The first hold display area Ga is set on the left side at the lower part of the display screen G, and the second hold display area Gb is set on the right side at the lower part of the display screen G.

In the first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga, the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The section is displayed so that it will be displayed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the first holding display area Ga includes the first unit holding display area Ga1 and the first. The 2 unit hold display area Ga2, the 3rd unit hold display area Ga3, and the 4th unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins the first operating port 33, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Ga1, and the game ball is first activated. When the number of holdings is 4 when the mouth 33 is won, a predetermined holding image is displayed in all of the 1st unit holding display area Ga1 to the 4th unit holding display area Ga4.

Further, in the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb, the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the second operating port 34 are arranged in the left-right direction. The section is displayed so that it can be installed. Specifically, when the game ball wins the second operating port 34, the maximum number of holdings is 4, and in correspondence with this, the second holding display area Gb includes the first unit holding display area Gb1 and the first. The 2 unit hold display area Gb2, the 3rd unit hold display area Gb3, and the 4th unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings is one when the game ball wins the second operating port 34, the holding image is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Gb1, and the game ball is placed in the second operating port 34. When the number of reserved images is four, the reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Gb1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Gb4.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery with MPU 112 of main control device 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lottery by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

The MPU 112 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, setting the display of the operation port display unit 43, setting the effect content of the symbol display device 41, setting the display of the through gate display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the hit random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating big hits and special hits, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the special hit type are shown. The special hit type counter C3 used for determination, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the fluctuation determining the fluctuation display time in the operation port display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41. The type counter CS is used. Further, the open random number counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, the information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special hit type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS has won a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. In this case, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as an information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 114b includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first operating port and a holding area Rb for the second operating port, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb are provided with a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter is provided according to the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special hit type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored in any of the areas as hold information. The reserved information corresponds to special information (judgment information).

In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be reserved and stored. Further, the reserved ball storage area 114b is provided with a reserved number storage area, and the number of reserved number storage areas for storing the winning history in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is specified in the reserved number storage area. Information to do is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the operation port display unit 43, and is executed at the start of one game. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. When the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 113a as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 113. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the first actuating port (FIG. 13 (a)) and a pass / fail table for the second actuating port (FIG. 13 (b)) are provided. In the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the winning / failing table for the first operating port is referred to, and in the lottery based on entering the ball into the second operating port 34, the winning / failing table for the second operating port is referred to. Will be done.

In the hit / fail table for the first operating port, as shown in FIG. 13A, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot results are three, “7”, “307”, and “507”. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from "0" to "599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results, and the probability of becoming a jackpot is 1/200. .. Further, in the hit / fail table for the first operating port, one of "207" corresponds to the special hit result, and the probability of becoming the special hit result is 1/600. It should be noted that the lottery results are configured to be out of order except for the random number value that is the jackpot result and the random number value that is the special hit result.

In the hit / fail table for the second operating port, as shown in FIG. 13B, the random number values corresponding to the jackpot results are three, “7”, “307”, and “507”. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7" corresponds to the big hit result, and the probability of becoming a big hit is 1/200. In the hit / fail table for the second operating port, 200 pieces of "0" to "199" and "400" to "499" correspond to the special hit result, and the probability of the special hit result is 1/3. ing. It should be noted that the lottery results are configured to be out of order except for the random number value that is the jackpot result and the random number value that is the special hit result.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for sorting the types when a jackpot is hit, and is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. It has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a jackpot type table (first distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113. Here, the contents of the jackpot type table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first operating port (FIG. 14 (a)) and a jackpot type table for the second operating port (FIG. 14 (b)) are provided. When a big hit is made based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the jackpot type table for the first operating port is referred to, and when a big hit is made based on the ball entering the second operating port 34. Refers to the jackpot type table for the second operating port.

As shown in FIG. 14A, in the jackpot type table for the first operating port, "0" to "39" correspond to the 3R jackpot result A, and "40" to "99" correspond to the 3R jackpot result. It corresponds to B. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of being distributed to the 3R jackpot result A is set to 40%, and the probability of being distributed to the 3R jackpot result B is set to 60%. When the 3R jackpot result A or the 3R jackpot result B is obtained, the game shifts to the jackpot game state in which the round game for three rounds is executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened three times.

As shown in FIG. 14B, in the jackpot type table for the second operating port, "0" to "69" correspond to the 3R jackpot result B, and "70 to 99" correspond to the 9R jackpot result. doing. That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of being distributed to the 3R jackpot result B is set to 70%, and the probability of being distributed to the 9R jackpot result is set to 30%. When the 3R jackpot result B is obtained, the game shifts to the jackpot game state in which the round game for three rounds is executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened three times. When the 9R jackpot result is obtained, the game shifts to the jackpot game state in which the round game for 9 rounds is executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened 9 times.

In the present embodiment, for each jackpot result, the support mode after the end of the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the gaming state when the jackpot result is obtained. Here, with reference to FIG. 15, the relationship between each jackpot and the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state will be supplementarily described.

First, the 3R jackpot result A will be described. If the 3R jackpot result A is obtained in a situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the 3R jackpot result A is obtained in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the support mode set when the limiter is activated and when it is not activated, which will be described later, is different. .. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state is the low frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state is the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 100 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 100 times. 100 times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the 3R jackpot result A as an opportunity is 100, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode is performed. When the number of game times related to the mouth 34 is 100, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high frequency support mode is 100 times. , The high frequency support mode will be switched to the low frequency support mode.

Next, the 3R jackpot result B will be described. If the 3R jackpot result B is obtained in a situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 7 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 1 time. Seven times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the 3R jackpot result B as an opportunity is 7, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode is performed. When the number of game times related to the mouth 34 is one, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode is seven. , The support mode will be switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the 3R jackpot result B is obtained in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the support modes set when the limiter is activated and when the limiter is not activated are different. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state is the low frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state is the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 100 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 100 times. 100 times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the 3R jackpot result B as an opportunity is 100, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode is performed. When the number of game times related to the mouth 34 is 100, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high frequency support mode is 100 times. , The high frequency support mode will be switched to the low frequency support mode.

Next, the 9R jackpot result will be described. If a 9R jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 7 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 1 time. Seven times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the 9R jackpot result as a trigger is seven, the second operating port executed during the high-frequency support mode. When the number of game times related to 34 is one, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode is seven. The support mode will be switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the 9R jackpot result is obtained in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the support modes set when the limiter is activated and when the limiter is not activated are different. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state is the low frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state is the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 100 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 100 times. 100 times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the 9R jackpot result as an opportunity reaches 100, the second operating port executed during the high-frequency support mode. When the number of game times related to 34 is 100, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high frequency support mode is 100 times. The high-frequency support mode will be switched to the low-frequency support mode.

The special hit type counter C3 is for sorting the types when a special hit is made, and is added one by one in the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). It is composed. The special hit type counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the special hit type counter C3 is stored as a special hit type table (second distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 113. Here, the contents of the special hit type table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As the special hit type table, a special hit type table for the first operating port (FIG. 16 (a)) and a special hit type table for the second operating port (FIG. 16 (b)) are provided. When a special hit is made based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the special hit type table for the first operating port is referred to, and a special hit is made based on the ball entering the second operating port 34. In that case, the jackpot type table for the second operating port is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the special hit type table for the first operating port, "0" to "99" correspond to the special hit result A. That is, when a special hit is won based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, it is set so that the special hit result A is distributed with a 100% probability. When the special hit result A is obtained, the special hit game (1 round opening / closing execution mode) by the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Specifically, the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to open and close in a low-frequency winning mode in which the game ball entered in the second variable winning device 32B is difficult to be distributed to the V winning area 356 (see FIG. 17A).

As shown in FIG. 16B, in the special hit type table for the second operating port, "0" to "39" correspond to the special hit result B, and "40" to "99" correspond to the special hit result C. It corresponds to. That is, when a special hit is won based on the ball entering the second operating port 34, the special hit result B is distributed with a probability of 40%, and the special hit result C is distributed with a probability of 60%. When the special hit result B or the special hit result C is obtained, the special hit game (1 round opening / closing execution mode) by the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Specifically, the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to open and close in a high-frequency winning mode in which the game ball entered in the second variable winning device 32B is easily distributed to the V winning area 356 (see FIG. 17A).

Here, the low-frequency winning mode and the high-frequency winning mode will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. Incidentally, since the operation of the distribution member 358 (see FIG. 7) is the same in both the low-frequency winning mode and the high-frequency winning mode, the operation of the distribution member 358 will be described first.

As shown in FIG. 18A, at the timing t1 which is the start timing of the game related to the special hit, the distribution member 358 ejects the game ball winning the second variable winning device 32B to the discharge area 357 (outside side). It is located in the position to distribute to. Then, at the timing t4 when the waiting time of 1 sec has elapsed from the timing t1, the distribution member 358 is displaced to the position where the game ball winning the second variable winning device 32B is distributed to the V winning area 356. After that, the state is maintained until the distribution time of 2 sec elapses from the timing t4, and the position returns to the position on the off-side side at the timing t5 when the distribution time elapses.

In this case, in the special winning game of the low frequency winning mode executed based on the special winning result A, 0.5 sec is set as the opening period of the special winning game (timing t2), and after the opening period has elapsed. , The second variable winning device 32B is opened for 0.1 sec (timing t3). That is, in the special winning game of the low frequency winning mode, the opening time (0.1 sec) of the second variable winning device 32B is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, which is extremely short. Even if the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize (the winning is hardly expected). Even if the game ball wins, the winning game is completed from the opening to the closing of the second variable winning device 32B at the timings t1 to t4 where the distribution member 358 is located on the discharge area 357 side. The balls are distributed to the discharge area 357. That is, since the period in which the distribution member 358 is located on the V winning area 356 side and the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened do not overlap, the game ball covers the V winning area 356. It is something that cannot be passed.

On the other hand, in the special hit game of the high frequency winning mode executed based on the special hit result B or the special hit result C, 0.5 sec is set as the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode as shown in FIG. 16B. (Timing t12), and after the opening period has elapsed, the second variable winning device 32B is opened for 1.8 seconds (timing t13). Therefore, in the special winning game of the high frequency winning mode, the distribution member 358 is displaced from the discharge area 357 side to the V winning area 356 side at the timing t13 when the second variable winning device 32B is being opened. Become. As a result, the period in which the distribution member 358 is located on the V winning area 356 side and the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened overlap, and the period is 1.3 sec. Since the firing cycle of the game balls is 0.6 sec, about two game balls can be won by the second variable winning device 32B during the period, so that one or more game balls are almost certainly for V winning. It is capable of passing through region 356.

In addition, in the special winning game of the high frequency winning mode, the period (0.5 sec) from the opening of the second variable winning device 32B to the start of displacement of the distribution member 358 toward the V winning region 356 side. ) Is a period shorter than the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the maximum number of winnings (10) in the open / close execution mode. Therefore, after the second variable winning device 32B is opened and before the distribution member 358 is displaced to the V winning area 356 side, the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 32B is the upper limit winning. It is avoided that the number of special hit games is reached and the special hit game ends (the special hit game ends without being distributed to the V winning area 356).

Here, regardless of the special hit results A to C, the mode of opening / closing control of the second variable winning device 32B during the winning game is the same, but the distribution result of the special hit type is V jackpot. It affects the distribution result of the jackpot type when the above occurs. That is, when the game ball that has won the second variable winning device 32B in the special winning game flows into the V winning area 356 and the V winning occurs, it depends on the type of the special winning game being executed at that time. The types of V jackpots are sorted. This distribution is performed using the jackpot type table (third sorting information group) for V jackpots stored in the sorting table storage area of the ROM 113.

As shown in FIG. 17B, in the jackpot type table for V jackpot, 3RV jackpot result, 5RV jackpot result, and 10RV jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results. In the jackpot type table for V jackpot, the type of the V winning flag described later and the type of the V jackpot result are associated with each other. That is, the type of the V jackpot result is determined by the type of the special hit result that triggered the V jackpot. Specifically, if the special winning game executed when the V winning occurs is triggered by the special winning result A, it is distributed to the 3RV jackpot result and executed when the V winning occurs. If the special hit game is triggered by the special hit result B, it is distributed to the 5RV jackpot result, and the special hit game executed when the V prize is generated is triggered by the special hit result C. If is, it is distributed to the 10RV jackpot result. When a 3RV jackpot result is obtained, the 3RV flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and when a 5RV jackpot result is obtained, the 5RV flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If this happens, the 10RV flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

In the present embodiment, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state differs depending on the game state when the special hit result is obtained. Here, the relationship between each V jackpot result and the support mode after the jackpot game state ends will be supplementarily described.

First, the result of the 3RV jackpot will be described. When the special hit result A is triggered in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the support mode after the end of the V big hit game state (hereinafter, also referred to as the big hit game state) is called the low frequency support mode. Become. On the other hand, when the special hit result A is triggered in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the support mode set when the limiter is activated and when the limiter is not activated, which will be described later, is different. .. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state is the low frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state is the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 100 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 100 times. 100 times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the 3RV jackpot result as an opportunity reaches 100, the second operating port executed during the high-frequency support mode. When the number of game times related to 34 is 100, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high frequency support mode is 100 times. The high-frequency support mode will be switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the result of the 5RV jackpot will be described. When the special hit result B is triggered in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 7 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 1 time. Seven times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the 5RV jackpot result as a trigger is seven, the second operating port executed during the high-frequency support mode. When the number of game times related to 34 is one, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode is seven. The support mode will be switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the special hit result B is triggered in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the support modes set when the limiter is activated and when the limiter is not activated are different. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state is the low frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state is the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 100 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 100 times. 100 times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the special hit result B as an opportunity is 100, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode is performed. When the number of game times related to the mouth 34 is 100, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high frequency support mode is 100 times. , The high frequency support mode will be switched to the low frequency support mode.

Next, the result of the 10RV jackpot will be described. When the special hit result C is triggered in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 7 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 1 time. Seven times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the 10RV jackpot result as a trigger is seven, the second operating port executed during the high-frequency support mode. When the number of game times related to 34 is one, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode is seven. The support mode will be switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the special hit result C is triggered in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the support modes set when the limiter is activated and when the limiter is not activated are different. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state is the low frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state is the high frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the first operation port 33 is 100 times, and the end reference number of game times (time reduction number) related to the second operation port 34 is 100 times. 100 times are set as the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and game times related to the second operating port 34. That is, when the number of game times related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted with the special hit result C as an opportunity reaches 100, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode is performed. When the number of game times related to the mouth 34 is 100, or when the total number of game times related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high frequency support mode is 100 times. , The high frequency support mode will be switched to the low frequency support mode.

In the MPU 112, the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the special hit type counter C3 stored in the execution area AE are used to display the first operating port display unit AS and the second operating port display unit. The stop result in the BS is determined, and the stop result table storage area of the ROM 113 is used in the determination.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS includes a variation display time and a fixed display time in the first operation port display unit AS and the second operation port display unit BS of the operation port display unit 43, and a symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. And are used in determining in the MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, it is stored in the holding area Ra for the first operating port of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins in the second operating port 34. It is stored in the reserved area Rb.

In the MPU 112, the fluctuation display time in the first operating port display unit AS and the second operating port display unit BS is determined by using the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE. In this case, the variable display time table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is used.

The open random number counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, reach the maximum value (that is, 199), and then return to 0. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric service holding area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. The value of the random number that wins (opening result) in this lottery is stored in the pass / fail table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 as a pass / fail table for the through gate. As the pass / fail table for the through gate, a table for the low frequency support mode and a table for the high frequency support mode are provided. When the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the pass / fail table for the through gate for the low frequency support mode is referred to, and when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the pass / fail table for the through gate for the high frequency support mode is referred to. Referenced.

In the pass / fail table for through gate for the low frequency support mode, the random number value corresponding to the opening result is one of "7", and the lottery result is out of order except for the random number value that is the opening result (electric accessory). The result is that 34a is not opened). That is, the probability of an open result is 1/200, and most of them are set to be an off result under the low frequency support mode. Then, when the result of the normal drawing winning / losing lottery is an open result under the low frequency support mode, the accessory opening / closing game of the electric accessory 34a is executed in the opening / closing mode for the low frequency support mode.

In the accessory opening / closing game for the low frequency support mode, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a is performed once from the start to the end of the accessory opening / closing game. The opening time in this case is set to 0.2 sec. Since this opening time is shorter than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball and is considered to be extremely short, it is difficult to win a prize even when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state (winning is almost impossible). It has become. Therefore, under the low frequency support mode, even if the result of the lottery is an open result, the winning of the second operating port 34 hardly occurs, and it is substantially based on the winning of the second operating port 34. You cannot win or lose the lottery.

The mode of the accessory opening / closing game for the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and if a prize is hardly generated in the second operating port 34, a plurality of opening / closing controls of the electric accessory 34a may be performed. It may be performed once, or the opening time may be set to a time other than 0.2 sec.

In the through gate pass / fail table for the high frequency support mode, the random number values corresponding to the open results are 190 from "0" to "189", and the lottery results are out of order except for the random number values that are the open results. (As a result of the electric accessory 34a not opening). That is, the probability of an open result is 190/200, and most of them are set to be an open result under the high frequency support mode. Then, when the result of the lottery is an open result under the high frequency support mode, the accessory opening / closing game of the electric accessory 34a is executed in the opening / closing mode for the high frequency support mode.

The opening time of the accessory opening / closing game for the high-frequency support mode is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball than the accessory opening / closing game for the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, in order to easily accumulate the hold related to the second operating port 34 and to easily receive the payout of the prize ball based on the entry of the ball into the second operating port 34, the opening time is the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec). Differentiated to be long enough.

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed for advancing the game by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 112, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the main process activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. The description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 112 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361-363 are read, and the states of the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361-363 are determined and detected. Execute the process to save the information. Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 325, 361 corresponding to the generation of the prize ball, the payout control device 97 is instructed to pay out the prize ball. Set the prize ball command for. For example, when a prize is detected in the first variable winning device 32A by the detection sensor 325 for the first large winning opening, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls. To set. In the following step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special hit type counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special hit type counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the through gate 35 is executed. In the through winning process, when the through gate 35 has been won, the number of winnings held in the electric service holding area 114c is less than the upper limit (for example, "4"). On condition that, the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service holding area 114c. In addition, the notification / effect control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the third hold light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the number of hold storages of the accessory.

In the following step S105, a winning process for the operating port is executed. Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first operating port 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the first operating port winning sensor 33a. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first operating port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set. In the following step S203, it is determined whether or not the first start hold storage number RaN stored in the hold ball storage area 114b is less than the maximum storable number (1) (whether or not it is 0). The first start hold storage number RaN is added to 1 when the hold information is stored in the hold information Ra for the first operation port based on the winning of the first operation port 33, and the game times of the first special figure are When started, it is subtracted by 1.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, 0, the process of adding 1 to the first start hold storage number RaN is executed in step S204. After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed in which the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special hit type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the hold area Ra for the first operating port. In the following step S206, the pre-confirmation process for the first operating port is executed. Details will be described later, but in this pre-confirmation process, the pre-confirmation of the jackpot etc. is performed for the hold acquired this time.

After that, in step S207, the setting process of the first hold command is executed. In such processing, the information that the first operating port 33 has been won is output to the notification / effect control device 82 side, and the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 33 this time is obtained. Information on the game times (game result information, fluctuation display time information, etc.) is output to the notification / effect control device 82 side.

In the present embodiment, in the situation where the upper limit number (4 pieces) of hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first operation port, the hold information is held even if the first operation port 33 is won. Is not acquired, so even if a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 in the situation, the output of the first hold command is not performed. This also applies to the second hold command described later.

If a negative determination is made in any of step S201 and step S203, or after the process of step S207 is executed, the process proceeds to step S208. In step S208, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second operating port 34 based on the detection state of the winning sensor 34c for the second operating port. When it is determined that the game ball has won the second operating port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out one game ball is set in step S209. In the following step S210, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold ball storage area 114b is less than the maximum storable number (1) (whether or not it is 0). The second start hold storage number RbN is added to 1 when the hold information is stored in the hold information Rb for the second operation port based on the winning of the second operation port 34, and the game times of the second special figure are When started, it is subtracted by 1.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, 0, the process of adding 1 to the second start hold storage number RbN is executed in step S211. After that, in step S212, information acquisition processing is performed in which the values of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special hit type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS are stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port. In the following step S213, the pre-confirmation process for the second operating port is executed. Details will be described later, but in this pre-confirmation process, the pre-confirmation of the jackpot etc. is performed for the hold acquired this time.

In the following step S214, the setting process of the second hold command is executed. In such a process, the information that the winning of the second operating port 34 has occurred is output to the notification / effect control device 82 side, and the pending information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 34 this time is obtained. Information on the game times (game result information, fluctuation display time information, etc.) is output to the notification / effect control device 82 side. If a negative determination is made in either step S208 or step S210, or after the process of step S214 is executed, the winning process for the main operating port ends.

The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S209 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process of the normal process described later. Further, the hold command set in step S207 and step S214 is also transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output processing of the normal processing. These hold commands include information on which of the winning ports of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is based on the winning, and in the notification / effect control device 82, By receiving the hold command, the display control device 212 sets the variable display by the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 side and the display setting of the reduced display area of the symbol provided at the corner of the display screen G. Let me do it.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process of FIG. 19, after executing the winning process for the operation port in step S105, the V winning process for detecting the occurrence of the V winning is executed in step S106, and then the V winning process is executed. This timer interrupt processing ends. The V prize processing will be described in detail later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S301 to S308 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S311 and S312 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S301. In the external signal output process of step S301, output data such as a timer interrupt process or a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If a command for effect is set, it is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82.

Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the following step S303, the game turn control process for advancing the game turn related to each of the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed. In this game time control process, a hit / fail judgment such as a big hit, a distribution judgment of a big hit type, and a distribution judgment of a special hit type are performed, a change display of a symbol is set by a symbol display device 41, and a display unit 43 for an operation port is used. Set the variable display, etc.

After executing the game turn control process of step S303, the process proceeds to step S304, and a process for shifting the game state to the special hit game state (special hit game state shift process) is executed. In the following step S305, a process for shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state (big hit gaming state transition process) is executed.

Next, in step S306, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the second operating port 34 is executed. In the following step S307, a V distribution setting process for driving and controlling the distribution member 358 provided in the second variable winning device 32B is executed.

The game turn control process in step S303, the transition process to the special hit game state in step S304, the transition process to the jackpot game state in step S305, the electric service support process in step S306, and the V distribution setting process in step S307. Details will be described later.

After executing the V distribution setting process in step S307, the game ball launch control process is executed in step S308. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 98. .. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S309, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set in the RAM 114. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is erased in the next main process.

If the power failure flag is not set, it means that the last process of the plurality of processes to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S310, that is, the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S311, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. Further, in step S312, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S301 to S308 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S309 that the power failure flag is set, it means that the power is cut off, so the power failure processing after step S313 is executed. That is, in step S313, the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and saved in step S314, access to the RAM 114 is prohibited in step S315, and then the power supply is completely shut off for processing. Continues an infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process in step S303 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game times control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the big hit game or the special hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not various jackpot flags and various special hit flags are stored (stored) in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The jackpot flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, and is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot game state in the transition process to the jackpot game state described later, and the jackpot game is stored in the same transition process. It is erased when the state is terminated. Further, the special hit flag is a flag indicating that the special hit game is being executed, and is stored when the game state is changed to the special hit game state in the transition process to the special hit game state described later. It is deleted when the special hit game state is terminated in the transition process.

When the jackpot game or the special hit game is being executed, the processing after step S402, that is, the processing for starting the game times in steps S404 to S406, the processing for proceeding with the game times in step S408, and the processing for ending the game times in step S409. This special figure game time control process is terminated without executing any of the processes. That is, when the big hit game or the special hit game is being executed, the game rounds related to the operating ports 33 and 34 are started regardless of whether or not the operating ports 33 and 34 have been won. There is no.

When the big hit game or the special hit game is not being executed, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the operation port display unit 43 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either one of the display unit AS for the first operating port or the display unit BS for the second operating port is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The variable display flag is stored when starting the variable display for either the first operating port display unit AS or the second operating port display unit BS, and is cleared when the variable display ends.

If the operation port display unit 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display on the operation port display unit 43 is completed. That is, after the variation display is completed, the result display is executed for a predetermined period, and in this step, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is completed.

When the confirmation display is completed, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S404 to S406. In the game round start process, first, in step S404, is the common hold number CRN, which is the total number of start hold storage numbers of the first operation port display unit AS and the second operation port display unit BS, "0"? Judge whether or not. When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the start hold storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34. Therefore, the main game times control process is terminated as it is.

When the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data for setting the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first operation port or the hold area Rb for the second operation port for variable display in step S405. After executing the setting process and further executing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the operation port display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 in step S406, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S405 and the fluctuation start process in step S406 will be described in detail below. First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Data setting process>
In the data setting process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port is “0”. When the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", the data setting process relating to the first operation port display unit AS in steps S502 to S506 is executed, and the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0". In this case, the data setting process related to the display unit BS for the second operating port in steps S507 to S512 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common hold number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the second operation port display unit BS is held for variable display. When the information is stored, the data stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start hold storage number RaN is 1 or more. I am trying to do it. As a result, when the holding information is stored in both the holding area Ra for the first operating port and the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding area Rb for the second operating port corresponding to the second operating port 34 The pending information stored in is given priority.

In the data setting process related to the display unit AS for the first operating port, first, in step S502, the first start hold storage number RaN of the holding area Ra for the first operating port is decremented by one. In the following step S503, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S504, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the holding area Ra for the first operating port is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S505, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the holding area Ra for the first operating port is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1 and the second area Ra2 → The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3.

In the following step S506, a shift command (shift generation) for the first operating port, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 82, which is the control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area RE has been shifted. Information) is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, the information that the hold area RE, which is the target of the data shift this time, corresponds to the hold area Ra for the first operation port, that is, the first operation port 33. A shift command for the first operating port that includes information on the correspondence is selected, and the selected shift command for the first operating port is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command for the first operating port set in step S506 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The notification / effect control device 82 performs a process for changing the display in the first hold display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds, based on the received shift command for the first operation port. Execute.

In the data setting process related to the display unit BS for the second operating port, first, in step S507, the second start holding storage number RbN of the holding area Rb for the second operating port is decremented by 1. In the following step S508, the common hold number CRN is decremented by 1. After that, in step S509, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the holding area Rb for the second operating port is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S510, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the holding area Rb for the second operating port is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Rb1 and the second area Rb2 → The data in each area is shifted such as 1st area Rb1, 3rd area Rb3 → 2nd area Rb2, 4th area Rb4 → 3rd area Rb3.

In the following step S511, the flag for the second operating port is set (stored) in the display unit flag storage area for the second operating port (display unit information storage means for the second operating port) provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. ). The flag for the second operating port is information for identifying that the start of the variation display this time is the variation display on the display unit BS side for the second operating port, in other words, the game times of the second special figure. Is a flag indicating that is being executed. The stored flag for the second operating port is erased when the game round of the second special figure is completed.

In the following step S512, a shift command for the second operating port (shift generation information), which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area RE has been shifted. ) Is set. In this case, from the command information storage area of the ROM 113, the information that the hold area RE, which is the target of the data shift this time, corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second operation port, that is, corresponds to the second operation port 34. A shift command for the second operating port that includes information about what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command for the second operating port is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process is terminated.

The shift command for the second operating port set in step S512 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). In the notification / effect control device 82, based on the received shift command for the second operating port, the display in the second hold light emitting unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 are displayed. , Execute the process to change according to the decrease in the number of pending items.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

<Fluctuation start processing>
In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114.

If the flag for the second operating port is not stored, the pass / fail judgment is performed with reference to the pass / fail table for the first operating port (see FIG. 13A) in step S602, and the flag for the second operating port is set. If it is stored, the pass / fail judgment is performed in step S603 with reference to the pass / fail table for the second operating port (see FIG. 13B). After the execution of step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the result of each of the above-mentioned hit / fail determinations is a jackpot result.

If the jackpot is won, in step S605, it is determined whether or not the flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the flag for the second operating port is not stored, the jackpot type distribution determination is performed in step S606 with reference to the jackpot type table for the first operating port (see FIG. 14A). On the other hand, when the flag for the second operating port is stored, the jackpot type distribution determination is performed in step S607 with reference to the jackpot type table for the second operating port (see FIG. 14B).

After the execution of step S606 or step S607, in step S608, the setting process of the stop result for the jackpot according to the distribution result is executed. This process sets the stop result for the jackpot for the pattern on the operation port display unit 43, and when the jackpot type is sorted to the 3R jackpot result A as a result of the distribution determination in step S606, the 3R jackpot Set the stop result for result A, and if the jackpot type is assigned to 3R jackpot result B, set the stop result for 3R jackpot result B (stop result different from the stop result for 3R jackpot result A). , When the jackpot type is assigned to the 9R jackpot result, the stop result for the 9R jackpot result (the stop result different from the stop result for the 3R jackpot results A and B) is set. As described above, the stop result of the pattern on the operation port display unit 43 is set based on the distribution result of the jackpot type, and substantially corresponds to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In that sense, the jackpot type counter C2 can be said to be a jackpot symbol counter for drawing the stop result of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43.

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the stop result of the pattern on the operation port display unit 43 is selected based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Even in this case, the stop result of the pattern and the distribution result of the jackpot type correspond to each other. Further, the stop result of the pattern may be configured such that one type of stop result corresponds to one jackpot type, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of stop results correspond to each other. Further, the stop picture in the display unit AS for the first operation port and the stop picture in the display unit BS for the second operation port may be shared.

After the execution of step S608, in step S609, various jackpot flags are set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 as information for specifying the jackpot type this time. Specifically, any one of the 3R flag A, the 3R flag B, and the 9R flag is set as corresponding to the 3R jackpot result A, the 3R jackpot result B, and the 9R jackpot result, respectively.

On the other hand, when a negative determination (determination that no big hit has occurred) is made in step S604, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination in step S602 or step S603 is a special hit result. If it is a special hit result, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. If the flag for the second operating port is not stored, the distribution determination of the special hit type is performed in step S612 with reference to the special hit type table for the first operating port (see FIG. 16A). On the other hand, when the flag for the second operating port is stored, the distribution determination of the special hit type is determined by referring to the special hit type table for the second operating port (see FIG. 16B) in step S613. Do.

After the execution of step S612 or step S613, in step S614, the stop result setting process for special hits according to the distribution result is executed. In this step, the stop result for special hit is set for the pattern on the display unit 43 for the operation port, and when the special hit type is sorted to the special hit result A as a result of the distribution determination in step S612, , Set the stop result for the special hit result A. If the special hit type is assigned to the special hit result B in step S613, the stop result for the special hit result B is set, and if the special hit type is assigned to the special hit result C, the stop result is set. Set the stop result for the special hit result C.

It should be noted that the number of types of stop results for one special hit type and the point that the stop pattern on the display unit AS for the first operating port and the stop pattern on the display unit BS for the second operating port may be shared are for big hits. This is the same as the case of the stop result of.

After the execution of step S614, in step S615, various special hit flags are set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 as information for specifying the special hit type this time. Specifically, one of the special hit A flag, the special hit B flag, and the special hit C flag is set as corresponding to the special hit result A, the special hit result B, and the special hit result C, respectively.

Further, when a negative determination (determination that no special hit has occurred) is made in step S610, a stop result corresponding to the disengagement result is set as the stop result in the operation port display unit 43 in step S616.

After executing step S609, step S615, or step S616, the process proceeds to step S617 to execute the variable display time setting process. In the variable display time setting process, the operating port display units AS and BS refer to any of the variable display time tables provided according to the result of the winning / losing lottery, the number of holdings, and various conditions of the game state. The variation display time of the symbol in the symbol and the symbol display device 41 is set.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S617, the variation start command and the type command are set as commands to be transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S618. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time (including the presence / absence of reach display). Further, the type command includes information on the jackpot type and the special hit type (and / or the jackpot pattern and the special hit pattern on the operation port display unit 43).

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and is open / closed execution mode (big hit game state or special hit game state). In the game machine in which the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result (big hit stop result or special hit stop result), the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is displayed. A display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the start.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, a hit corresponding to the occurrence of a big hit game state or a special hit game state It is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may hold a combination of symbols is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variation display of the symbol, there is a possibility that a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode is established on the preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols with a certain character, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

More specifically, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 10). Then, when the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display and a jackpot game state occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated. In addition, even when a special hit game state occurs in a specific state, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the middle symbol string is displayed. The variation display of the symbol in Z2 is finished.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed, or before the reach display, it may be determined by using the random number counter for the effect whether or not the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed.

After that, in step S621, among the display unit AS for the first operating port and the display unit BS for the second operating port, the variable display of the pattern is started in the display unit corresponding to the special figure game times this time. In this case, if the flag for the second operating port is not stored in the RAM 114, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to this special figure game is the display unit AS for the first operating port, and the second operation is performed. When the mouth flag is stored, it is specified that the result display unit corresponding to this special figure game is the second operating mouth display unit BS. After that, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the special figure game time control process of FIG. 22, when a negative judgment (determined that the variable display is in progress) is made in step S402 or a negative judgment (determined that the final display is not completed) is made in step S403. Proceeds to step S407, and executes the game round progress processing of steps S407 and S408. In the game round progress process, first, in step S407, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the special figure game round has elapsed.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S408. In the variable display processing, the result display unit is displayed and controlled so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display unit related to the special figure game round (light emission control of each display segment). ), And end the game times control process.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the confirmation display process (game round end process) is executed in step S409. The confirmation display processing is for confirming the design of the operation port display unit 43 based on the stop result set in the processing of step S608, step S614 or step S616. Here, the confirmation display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the confirmation display process, first, in step S701, the operation port display unit 43 determines whether or not the confirmation display of the design (stop result) is in progress. If it is determined that the confirmation display is not in progress, the process of setting the confirmation display time is executed in step S702. In this step, the fixed display time defined for each game state is set in the fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the fixed display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) is activated.

In the following step S703, a process for starting the confirmation display, that is, a process for stopping and displaying the pattern that is variablely displayed on the operation port display unit 43 is executed. In this case, based on the stop result setting process of step S608, step S614 or step S616 of FIG. 24, the display control for the operation port 43 is controlled so that the mode of the stop display of the pattern is the set stop result. To do.

In the following step S704, the variable end command is set, and then the final confirmation display process ends. The variable end command contains information on the confirmed display time. The set variable end command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). By receiving the fluctuation end command, the notification / effect control device 82 grasps that the confirmation display has been started on the operation port display unit 43 and the confirmation display time thereof.

The setting process (transmission process) of the variable end command may be omitted. In this case, the command is set so that the fluctuation start command (step S618 in FIG. 24) includes the information on the confirmed display time.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination (determined that the confirmation display is in progress) is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S705 to determine whether or not the confirmation display time has elapsed. If the confirmation display time has not elapsed, the final confirmation processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the process for terminating the high-frequency support mode for terminating the high-frequency support mode is executed in step S706. After that, in step S707, the flag for the second operating port stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the final confirmation display process is completed.

In addition, the design (stop result) stopped and displayed on the display units AS and BS for each operating port has a fixed display time when the next game round (variable display) is not started on the display unit where the design is stopped and displayed. It will continue to be displayed as stopped after the elapse. Therefore, if there is no hold memory for the next special figure game, a new hold memory is generated, and the result of the winning / failing lottery of the previous game is supported until the next game is started. The stop result continues to be displayed. In addition, even when the game state is changed to the big hit game state or the special hit game state, the stop result of the game time that triggered the transition to the game state is until the end of these game states and the start of a new game time. Continues to be displayed.

<Transition process to special hit game state>
Next, the process of shifting to the special hit game state in step S304 in the normal process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, is stored at the start of the jackpot game, and is erased when the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the special hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special hit game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. The special winning game flag is a flag indicating that the special winning game is being executed.

If it is determined that the special hit game is not being executed (the special hit game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S803, and the various special hit flags (step S615 in FIG. 24) are set in the various flag storage areas 114e. Determine if it is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the winning state is a special hit.

When it is determined that various special hit flags are stored, it is determined in step S804 whether or not it is the end timing of the game round. If it is not the end timing of the game round, the transition process to the special hit game state is terminated as it is. Further, even if an affirmative determination (determination that a big hit game is being executed) is made in step S801 or a negative determination (determination that various special hit flags are not stored) is made in step S803, this special hit game state is also obtained. End the migration process to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the game round, the start process of the special hit game is executed in step S805. In the start process, the special hit game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, and it is checked that the second variable winning device 32B is in the closed state before the start of the special hit game. Further, in this start process, an opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the second variable winning device 32B at the start of the special winning game is executed. In the opening period setting process, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the first timer counter area TC1 provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value (counter value) set in the first timer counter area TC1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

In the following step S806, a process of setting "1" in the round counter area RC1 provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed to set the number of times the round game is executed in the special hit game.

In the following step S807, the opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing (FIG. 21). The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

In the following step S808, after executing the external signal setting process, the transition process to the special hit game state is completed. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special hit signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the special hit signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the special hit signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the special hit signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is special in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that a hit has occurred.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination (determination that the special hit game is being executed) is made in step S802, the process proceeds to step S809 to determine whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the transition process to the special hit game state is terminated as it is.

When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S810, and a special hit opening / closing process for opening / closing the second large winning opening 351 of the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Here, the opening / closing process for special hits will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

<Opening and closing processing for special hits>
In the special hit opening / closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second large winning opening 351 of the second variable winning device 32B is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the driving unit 353 of the second variable winning device 32B. When the second large winning opening 351 is not open, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", and in step S903, the first timer counter area TC1 of the RAM 114 is determined. It is determined whether or not the value of is "0".

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is not "0", the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904, and the special hit flag B is set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special hit flag C is stored.

When any of the above special hit flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S905, and "900" (corresponding to 1.8 sec) is set in the first timer counter area TC1 as the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B. set. On the other hand, when neither of the above special hit flags B and C is stored, the process proceeds to step S906, and the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B is set to "50" (0.1 sec) in the first timer counter area TC1. Equivalent to) is set.

After the execution of step S905 or step S906, in step S907, the processing for setting the maximum number of winnings to the second variable winning device 32B in the special winning game is performed. Specifically, a value of "10" corresponding to the maximum number of winnings is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114.

In the following step S908, the drive unit 353 for the opening / closing door 352 is brought into the driving state in order to bring the second variable winning device 32B into the open state. Then, in step S909, the release command is set, and the opening / closing process for this special hit is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

If it is determined in step S901 that the second large winning opening 351 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S910 to determine whether or not the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is "0". .. If the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S911 whether or not the second variable winning device 32B has been won. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process for this special hit is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when a prize has been generated, the value of the first prize counter area PC1 is subtracted by 1 in step S912. In the following step S913, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the opening / closing process for this special hit is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S913 or step S910, it means that the closing condition of the second large winning opening 351 has been satisfied. In such a case, in step S914, the drive unit 353 is put into a non-drive state in order to close the second prize opening 351.

In the following step S915, the value of the round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1, and in step S916, the ending start processing is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the special hit game is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 113 is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Then, in step S917, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing (FIG. 21).

Returning to the description of the transition process to the special hit game state of FIG. 26, after executing the special hit opening / closing process of step S810, whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0” is determined in step S811. judge. Further, in step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition process to the special hit game state is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the end processing of the special winning game is executed in step S813, and then the special winning game is executed. End the transition process to the state. Here, the end processing of the special hit game in step S813 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

<End processing of special hit game>
In the end processing of the special hit game, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. This V-winning flag is stored in the V-winning process in step S106 in the timer interrupt process of FIG.

Here, the V winning process in step S106 will be described. Further, as a process related to the V winning, the V distribution setting process in step S307 in the normal process will be described. First, the V distribution setting process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

<V distribution setting process>
In the V distribution setting process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the special winning game. When it is the start timing, “500” corresponding to 1 sec is set in the second timer counter area TC2 provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 in step S1102. The value (counter value) set in the second timer counter area TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

In the following step S1103, "1" is set in the distribution number counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 114d. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution number counter area HC is for the MPU 112 to specify the operation number of the distribution member 358.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or after the process of step S1103 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, by grasping the drive state of the drive unit 359 for the distribution member, it is determined whether or not the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the V winning area 356. When the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the discharge area 357, it is determined in step S1305 whether or not the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is not "0", the main distribution setting process is terminated, while if it is determined to be "0", the distribution number counter is in step S1106. It is determined whether or not the value of the area HC is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, that is, if the value of the distribution count counter area HC is "1", the distribution member 358 is displaced to the position on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 in step S1107. Let me. In the following step S1108, "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC. After the execution of step S1108 or when a positive determination is made in step S1106, the main distribution setting process ends.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, that is, when the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the V winning area 356, the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is "0" in step S1109. It is determined whether or not the period for positioning the distribution member 358 on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, the distribution member 358 is displaced to the position on the distribution side to the discharge area 357 in step S1110, and then the value of the distribution count counter area HC is subtracted by 1 in step S1111. Execute the process. After the execution of step S1111 or when a negative determination is made in step S1109, the main distribution setting process ends.

Next, the V winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<V prize processing>
In the V winning process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1202, and whether or not V winning has occurred based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 362 provided in the second variable winning device 32B (corresponding to the above). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 362) is determined.

If it is determined that the V prize has occurred, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the V prize is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period determined in advance, and for example, a period during which the special hit game is executed and a V-side distribution period of the distribution member 358 are set as the valid period. If it is determined that the period is not valid, the process proceeds to step S1204, an error command is set as a transmission target to the notification / effect control device 82, and then the V winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 21), and the notification / effect control device 82 controls the display so that a predetermined error notification is executed. It controls the device 212, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period is in effect, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. In the following step S1206, a V winning command is set as a transmission target to the notification / effect control device 82. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification / effect control device 82 that a V winning has occurred, and the set V winning command is notified / produced by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 21). It is transmitted to the control device 82. In the notification / effect control device 82, when a V winning command is received, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 notify the occurrence of the V winning, or congratulate the V winning. The display control device 212 and the like are controlled so as to be executed.

After the execution of step S1206, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 or a negative determination is made in step S1202, the V winning process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the end processing of the special winning game of FIG. 28, if it is determined in step S1001 that the V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1002 and the processing of setting the V winning flag corresponding to the special winning type. To execute. This process refers to the various special hit flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and stores the V winning flag corresponding to the special hit flag in the various flag storage areas 114e. For example, the special winning game to be ended is triggered by winning the special winning result A, and when the special winning flag A is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, V is won as the V winning flag. The flag A is stored, the V winning flag B is stored as the V winning flag when the special winning flag B is stored, and the V winning flag C is stored as the V winning flag when the special winning flag C is stored. To store. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that the V jackpot game should be started and the type of the V jackpot game.

In the following step S1003, a process of erasing the V winning flag, various special hit flags, and special hit game flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is executed. In the following step S1004, the V winning command is set as the transmission target to the notification / effect control device 82, and then the end processing of the special hit game is ended. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification / effect control device 82 that the V jackpot game is started and the type of the V jackpot game, and the set V winning command is a normal process (FIG. 21). It is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 by external output processing. In the notification / effect control device 82, when the V winning command is received, the display control is performed so that the V jackpot game is started and the effect of notifying the type of the V jackpot game is executed by the symbol display device 41 or the like. It controls the device 212 and the like.

On the other hand, if a negative determination (determination that the V winning flag is not stored) is made in step S1001, various special hit flags and special hit games stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are determined in step S1005. The process of clearing the flag is executed, and then the end process of this special hit game is ended.

Next, the process of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in step S305 in the normal process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. Of the various processes included in this transition process, the same processes as those included in the above-mentioned transition process to the special winning game state will be simplified as appropriate.

<Transition process to the jackpot game state>
In the process of shifting to the jackpot game state, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the special hit game is being executed. If it is determined that the special hit game is being executed, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated, while if it is determined that the special hit game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S1302 and the jackpot game is performed. Determine if it is running.

If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not various V winning flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the V jackpot game should be started. If it is determined that the various V winning flags are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1304, and it is determined whether or not the various jackpot flags (step S609 in FIG. 24) are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. That is, it is determined whether or not to start a normal jackpot game that is not a V jackpot game.

If it is determined that the various jackpot flags are not stored, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated, while if it is determined that the various jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S1305 and the game times. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of. If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the game round, the process of shifting to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1305 that it is the end timing of the game round, or if it is determined in step S1303 that various V winning flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S1306 to execute the jackpot game start process. In the start process, the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and the opening period setting process is executed.

In the following step S1307, the round setting process is executed. Specifically, it is determined which of the 3R flag A, the 3R flag B, the 9R flag, the 3RV flag, the 5RV flag, and the 10RV flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. If it is determined that these flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S1308 to set the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Specifically, when the 3R flags A and B are stored, "3" is set in the round counter area RC1, and when the 9R flag is stored, "9" is set in the round counter area RC1. If the 3RV flag is stored, "2" is set in the round counter area RC1, and if the 5RV flag is stored, "4" is set in the round counter area RC1 and the 10RV flag is stored. If so, set "9" in the round counter area RC1.

After the execution of step S1307, the opening command is set in step S1308, the external signal setting process is further executed in step S1309, and then the transition process to the main jackpot game state is completed.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the jackpot game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1310 to determine whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not passed, the process of shifting to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1311, and the jackpot opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first big winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is executed. In the jackpot opening / closing process, when the first winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is closed, the drive for the opening / closing door 322 is provided on the condition that the round number counter RC is "1" or more. By putting the unit 323 in the driving state, the first large winning opening 321 is opened. When the first big winning opening 321 is open, a predetermined time (30 sec) has passed since the opening of the first big winning opening 321 or a predetermined number (10) of game balls are won. On condition that this is done, the driving state of the driving unit 323 is stopped, and the first large winning opening 321 is closed.

After executing the jackpot opening / closing process in step S1311, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is “0”. Further, in step S1313, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the big hit game is executed in step S1314, and then the main big hit. The process of transitioning to the game state is completed. Here, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game in step S1314 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Transition processing at the end of the jackpot game>
In the transition process at the end of the jackpot game, first, in step S1401, the update process of the continuous number counter CC stored in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is executed. Specifically, the continuous number counter CC is added by "1". The continuous number counter CC is a counter for specifying the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called number of consecutive villas) in the high frequency support mode.

In the following step S1402, it is determined whether or not the 3R flag B, 9R flag or various V winning flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the jackpot corresponding to the shift of the support mode to the high frequency support after the end of the jackpot game is stored.

If it is determined that any of the above flags is stored, the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a big hit or a special hit in the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous number counter CC described above has reached the upper limit (limiter). If a negative determination is made in step S1404, the process proceeds to step S1405 to set the game count counter GC provided in various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Regarding the game count counter GC, a game count counter GC1 for the first operating port for counting the number of times the game is executed for the first operating port in the high frequency support mode, and a second game counter GC in the high frequency support mode. The game count counter GC2 for the second operating port for counting the number of times the game times are executed related to the operating port 34, and the game times and the second operating port 34 related to the first operating port 33 in the high frequency support mode. It is roughly classified into a game count counter GC3 for counting the number of times the game is executed. For example, when the jackpot result of this time is 3R jackpot B, "100" is set in each of the game count counters GC1 to GC3 (see FIGS. 15 and 17).

In the following step S1406, the high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, and then the high-frequency support mode for notifying the notification / effect control device 82 that the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode is performed. A command (high frequency support setting information) is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82. After the execution of step S1406, the process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, various jackpot flags, V winning flags, and jackpot game flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e are erased, and the transition process at the end of the main jackpot game is completed.

Returning to the description of step S1404, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, that is, if the value of the continuous number counter CC has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1408. In step S1408, the continuous number counter CC is reset (cleared to zero). After that, after clearing the flag in step S1407, the transition process at the end of this big hit game is completed.

Returning to the description of step S1403, if a negative determination is made in step S1403, that is, if the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a big hit or a special hit in the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds in step S1409 and the RAM 114 The game count counter GC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the above is performed. For example, when the jackpot result of this time is 3R jackpot B, "7" is set in the game count counter GC1, "1" is set in the game count counter GC2, and "7" is set in the game count counter GC3 (FIGS. 15 and 15 and). (See FIG. 17). After that, after executing each of the processes of steps S1406 and S1407, the transition process at the end of this jackpot is completed.

Returning to the description of step S1402, if a negative determination is made in step S1402, that is, if the 3R flag A is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode this time is triggered by a big hit in the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1410, each process of step S1408 and step S1407 is executed, and then the transition process at the end of the big hit game is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1410, each process of steps S1404 to S1408 is executed, and then the transition process at the end of the big hit game ends.

Next, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode in step S708 in the final display process of FIG. 25 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

In the high-frequency support mode termination process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the termination process of the high-frequency support mode is terminated, while if it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1502. The process of subtracting the value of the game count counter GC by "1" is executed. Specifically, when the current game times are the game times related to the first operating port 33, the values of the game count counters GC1 and GC3 are subtracted by "1", and the current game times are set to the second operating port 34. In the case of the game times, the values of the game count counters GC2 and GC3 are subtracted by "1".

In the following step S1503, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter GC (specifically, any of the game count counters GC1 to GC3) is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the game count counter GC is not "0", the processing for ending the high frequency support mode is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the game count counter GC is "0", the process proceeds to step S1504, and the high-frequency support flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e are deleted. As a result, the high-frequency support mode ends, and the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

After the execution of step S1504, in step S1505, it is determined whether or not the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner on the through-gate display unit 44. If it is determined that the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S1506, and it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery relating to the through gate 35 is the open result. If it is an open result, the process proceeds to step S1507, and a process of changing the pattern stopped and displayed on the through-gate display unit 44 to one corresponding to the off result is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode ends during the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit 44, the stop result is forcibly rewritten to the off result. Therefore, even if the opening result is obtained in the open lottery held before the end of the high-frequency support mode, the character opening / closing game of the electric accessory 34a based on the winning result is executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode. Not done. If the high-frequency support mode ends while the through-gate display unit 44 confirms and displays the disconnection result, the stop result has already been displayed, so that the above-mentioned change is not executed.

After the execution of step S1507 or when a negative determination is made in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1508 to execute a process of ending the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit 44. That is, when the high-frequency support mode ends during the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit 44, the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit 44 is terminated at the end timing of the support mode. To do. As a result, the state in which the winning of the second operating port 34 is given preferential treatment ends with the end of the high frequency support mode.

After the execution of step S1508 or when a negative determination is made in step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1509, and the high-frequency support end command for notifying the notification / effect control device 82 that the high-frequency support mode has ended is notified. -Set as a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 82. After the execution of step S1509, the high-frequency support mode termination process is terminated.

Next, the electric service support process in step S306 in the normal process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 34 and 35.

<Processing for electrical support>
As shown in FIG. 34, in the electric service support process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The supporting flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched to the open state and is cleared when the electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is returned to the closed state.

If the supporting flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open lottery for whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is won, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TCS provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TCS is not "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is.

If the value of the timer counter TCS is "0", the process proceeds to step S1604, and it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variation display of the pattern on the through gate display unit 44. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1605, after setting the off display and setting the timer counter TCS to "250" (corresponding to 0.5 sec), the main electric service support process is terminated. .. By setting the off display, the variation display of the pattern on the through gate display unit 44 is terminated in the state where the off display is stopped and displayed, and this off display is continued for 0.5 sec.

If the value of the timer counter TCS is "0" and it is not the end timing of the fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S1606, and it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory hold storage number SN is larger than "0". If the value of the character hold storage number SN is "0", the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the accessory hold storage number SN is larger than "0", it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode.

If the high frequency support mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S1607, and the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support by the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric service holding area 114c is shifted and stored in the open random number counter C4 value shifted to the execution area AE and the pass / fail table storage area 113a of the ROM 113. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the high frequency support mode. Further, at the same time as the open lottery, "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter TCS. The timer counter TCS is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit 44 is continued until the value of the timer counter TCS becomes "0", that is, for 0.2 sec.

In the following step S1609, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1608 is a winning result (opening result), that is, a support winning. If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1610, and the main electric service support process is terminated.

If the low frequency support mode is in progress, a negative determination is made in step S1607, and the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support by the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric service holding area 114c is shifted and stored in the open random number counter C4 value shifted to the execution area AE and the pass / fail table storage area 113a of the ROM 113. The open lottery is performed with reference to the lottery table for the low frequency support mode. Further, at the same time as the open lottery, "2000 to 30000" (that is, equivalent to 400 to 600 sec) is set in the timer counter TCS. After that, the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit 44 is continued until the value of the timer counter TCS becomes "0", that is, for 400 to 600 sec.

In the following step S1612, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1611 is a winning result (opening result), that is, a support winning. If the support is not won, the processing for main electric service support is terminated as it is. If the support is won, the support winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1613, and the main electric service support process is terminated.

The probability of winning support in the high-frequency support mode (190/200 in detail) is higher than the probability of winning support in the low-frequency support mode (1/200 in detail), and high-frequency support Mode is given preferential treatment.

Returning to the description of step S1602, when the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1614, and the value of the timer counter TCS is "0". It is determined whether or not it is. If the value of the timer counter TCS is not "0", the pattern variation display on the through-gate display unit 44 is in progress, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. When the value of the timer counter TCS is "0", the hit display is set in step S1615. As a result, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit 44 is terminated in the state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. In the following step S1616, the supporting flag is set in the various flag storage areas 114e, the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is erased, and then the main electric service support process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S1601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, that is, if the supporting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, the process proceeds to step S1317 to open and close the electric accessory 34a. After executing the electric service opening / closing process for control, the main electric service support process is terminated. Hereinafter, the electric service opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 35.

<Electric service opening / closing process>
In the electric function opening / closing process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 34b is in the driving state. If the electric accessory 34a is open, the process proceeds to step S1702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the final display of the pattern on the operating port display unit 43 in the final game round in the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1703.

In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the number of winnings after opening the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit (“10” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S1703, the process proceeds to step S1704 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TCS is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TCS is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TCS is "0", or if it is determined in step S1703 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, a closing process for switching (returning) the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed. After that, in step S1706, the supported flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e are erased, and the main electric function opening / closing process is completed.

Returning to the description of step S1702, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, that is, when it is the timing when the final display of the pattern on the operation port display unit 43 ends in the final game round in the high frequency support mode, the step. The opening / closing process is executed in S1705, and then the supporting flag is cleared in step S1706 to end the main electric function opening / closing process. That is, in the present embodiment, when the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is forcibly switched to the closed state, and the second after switching to the low frequency support mode. The two operating ports 34 are configured so as to be substantially impossible to win a prize.

If it is possible to configure the second operating port 34 to be substantially impossible to win after switching to the low frequency support mode, the timing for forcibly switching the electric accessory 34a to the closed state May be changed arbitrarily. For example, it is possible to forcibly switch the electric accessory 34a to the closed state when it is the timing when the final display of the pattern on the operation port display unit 43 is started in the final game round in the high frequency support mode. Is.

Returning to the description of step S1701, if the electric accessory 34a is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1701 and the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, it is determined whether or not the timer counter TCS is “0”. If the timer counter TCS is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. When the timer counter TCS is "0", in step S1708, an opening process for switching the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed.

After that, in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. If the high-frequency support mode is in progress, the timer counter TCS is set to "1500" (corresponding to 3 sec) in step S1710, and then the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the low frequency support mode is in progress, the timer counter TCS is set to "40" (corresponding to 0.08 sec) in step S1410, and then the main electric service opening / closing process is terminated.

<About the basic game flow>
Next, the basic game flow of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect a prize in the second operating port 34. For this reason, the player makes a so-called left-handed hit, launches a game ball on the left route, and plays with the aim of winning a prize in the first operating port 33.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 33, a winning / failing lottery is executed based on the winning. When the 3R jackpot A or the 3R jackpot B is won by the hit / fail lottery, the first variable winning device 32A shifts to the jackpot game state in which the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds (for example, 3 rounds). Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the first variable winning device 32A, the player increases the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 60 and launches the game ball on the right route to play the game. Will be done (so-called right-handed).

The details will be described later, but whether the jackpot game state is triggered by the 3R jackpot A or the 3R jackpot B is determined by the effect executed by the symbol display device 41 or the like during the jackpot game state. Explicit to the person. Then, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, if the 3R jackpot A is an opportunity, the game shifts (returns) to the normal gaming state. In this case, the player returns the firing mode of the game ball to left-handed, and again aims at the jackpot based on the winning of the first operating port 33. On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state this time is triggered by the 3R jackpot B, the game shifts to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Regarding the special game state, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode and the end reference number of the game times related to the second operating port 34 becomes "1", and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. 2 Acquired during the second special game state in which the reference number of times of the end of the game times related to the operating port 34 is "100", and the first special game state or the second special game state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode. It is composed of a third special gaming state in which the game times related to the second operating port 34 are executed by the hold related to the second operating port 34. After the jackpot game state triggered by the 3R jackpot B in the normal game state is completed, the state shifts to the first special game state.

In the first special gaming state, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, so that it becomes easy to generate a prize in the second operating port 34. Only game balls flowing down the right route can win a prize in the second operating port 34. Therefore, at the time of transition to the first special game state, a notification prompting the player to continue right-handed even after the end of the jackpot game is executed.

The first special game state continues until the game times related to the second operating port 34 of the end reference number of times (1 time) are completed. As already explained, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 is given preferential treatment so that the probability of winning a special win is higher. The actual winning probability including the above will rise sharply from 1/200 to 1/3.

During the first special game state, the game times related to the second operating port 34 are executed only once. Therefore, the probability of winning the result during the first special game state is about 1/3. If the game times in the first special game state are lost, the game shifts to the third special game state. In the present embodiment, the second operating port 34 has a holding function in which the upper limit of the number of holdings is four. Therefore, if four hold information related to the second operating port 34 is stored at the end of the high frequency support mode (at the end of the first game round related to the second operating port 34), the high frequency support mode Even after the end of the process, it will be possible to receive a winning / failing lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34 four times. That is, even if the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode and the normal game state is internally, the special game state is changed by the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 at the end of the high frequency support mode. It will be extended (continued). By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a special hit is about 80% in the winning / failing lottery related to the second operating port 34 four times. And the total continuation rate including the high frequency support mode (one time) is about 87%.

When all four game times in the third special game state are disengaged and all the reserved information related to the second operation port 34 is exhausted, the normal game state is restored. That is, when the hold related to the second operating port 34 is used up without any special hit or big hit, the player is demoted from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state. In this case, the player returns the firing mode of the game ball to left-handed, and again aims at the jackpot based on the winning of the first operating port 33.

On the other hand, if any of the special hits B to C is obtained during the third special game state, the game shifts to the special hit game state. In the special winning game state, the special winning game in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened and closed is executed in the high-frequency winning mode described above. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the second variable winning device 32B, when a special hit occurs, the player strikes right to play the game. Then, when a V prize is generated in the special hit game, the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds (2 rounds, 4 rounds, 9 rounds) after the end of the special hit game. It shifts to the jackpot game state.

Incidentally, the second operating port 34 in the present embodiment is arranged at a position in the middle of the right route (see FIG. 4), and when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game of flowing down the right route. The ball is configured so that it cannot bypass the second operating port 34. The opening time (1.8 sec) of the second variable winning device 32B when the special winning game is executed in the high frequency winning mode is longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, and the game ball in the normal mode. It is possible to easily generate a prize in the second variable winning device 32B if the second variable winning device 32B is fired.

Further, under the high frequency winning mode, the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened and the period in which the distribution member 358 is arranged on the V winning area 356 side overlap, and the second variable winning is performed. The game ball that has won the device 32B can be easily distributed to the V winning area 356 side. Therefore, by generating a prize in the second variable winning device 32B, a V prize is always generated or almost generated. In other words, by the occurrence of special hits, it is almost certain that V jackpots will occur. After the end of the V jackpot game state triggered by the special hit in the third special game state, the state shifts to the first special game state.

In this way, the probability of occurrence of the V jackpot is the same as or close to the probability of winning the special win in the winning / losing lottery relating to the second operating port 34, but the probability of winning the special winning is the winning / losing lottery relating to the first operating port 33. It is 1/3 higher than the probability of winning a big hit in. Therefore, the jackpot (V jackpot) can be generated with a high probability in the special gaming state in which the gaming times mainly related to the second operating port 34 proceed. That is, the high-frequency support mode in the pachinko machine 10 is, as a player's sense, a gaming state equivalent to a high-probability mode (so-called probabilistic state or high-probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is increased.

Here, if any of the special hits A to C is obtained during the first special game state, the game shifts to the special hit game state. In the special winning game state, the special winning game in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened and closed is executed in the high-frequency winning mode described above. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the second variable winning device 32B, when a special hit occurs, the player strikes right to play the game. Then, when a V prize is generated in the special hit game, the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds (2 rounds, 4 rounds, 9 rounds) after the end of the special hit game. It shifts to the jackpot game state.

When a V jackpot occurs, there are 2RV jackpots, 4RV jackpots, and 9RV jackpots with different numbers of rounds, but in each case, the support mode after the V jackpot game ends shifts to the high frequency support mode. Whether or not it is configured depends on the relationship between the special game state in which the player was staying and the operation of the limiter.

Specifically, when a 2RV jackpot, a 4RV jackpot, or a 9RV jackpot is triggered by a special hit in the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is set. The mode shifts to the second special gaming state on condition that the number of consecutive jackpots does not reach the above-mentioned upper limit (limiter is not activated). On the other hand, if a 2RV jackpot, a 4RV jackpot, or a 9RV jackpot is triggered by a special hit in the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is used. The state shifts to the third special gaming state on condition that the number of consecutive jackpots has reached the above-mentioned upper limit (limiter operation). When a 2RV jackpot, a 4RV jackpot, or a 9RV jackpot is triggered by a special hit during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the number of consecutive jackpots under the high frequency support mode is The state shifts to the second special gaming state on condition that the above-mentioned upper limit is not reached (limiter is not activated). In addition, when a special hit during the third special gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode becomes a 2RV jackpot, a 4RV jackpot, or a 9RV jackpot, the process shifts to the first special gaming state.

In the winning / failing lottery related to the second operating port 34, a big hit lottery is also performed in addition to the special winning lottery, and a big hit may be won. In this case, a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed is executed. After the end of the jackpot game, the first special game state in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode on condition that the number of consecutive jackpots under the high frequency support mode does not reach the above-mentioned upper limit (limiter is not activated) or It shifts to the second special game state. Specifically, when the limiter is not activated, it shifts to the second special gaming state, and when the limiter is activated, it shifts to the third special gaming state.

That is, even if the jackpot is won by the winning / losing lottery related to the second operating port 34 in the special gaming state, the gaming state in which the V jackpot can be generated with a high probability can be looped. However, in this case, the jackpot winning probability is 1/200, which is lower than the special winning winning probability. Therefore, in the special game state, the game that generates the special hit → V jackpot is the main game.

In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning / failing result related to the first operating port 33 also includes the special winning result, a special winning based on the winning / failing lottery related to the first operating port 33 may occur in the normal gaming state. .. However, in the special winning game in this case, since the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to open and close in the low frequency winning mode, the V winning is not generated and the V jackpot game is not executed.

As described above, when the game ball is launched to the right route, the first operating port 33 is prevented from winning a prize. However, there is a possibility that the hold information related to the first operating port 33 acquired during the normal gaming state remains immediately after the transition to the special gaming state, and the holding information related to the second operating port 34 has not been acquired. There is. Although the hold information related to the second operating port 34 is preferentially digested over the holding information related to the first operating port 33, the holding information related to the second operating port 34 has been acquired. If not, the game times related to the first operating port 33 can be executed in the special game state. Regarding the game result related to the second operating port 34, although there is a difference in the degree of advantage so as to be more advantageous to the player than the game result related to the first operating port 33, the game times related to the second operating port 34 It is feared that the termination of the high-frequency support mode without being executed or being executed inadequately will be a great disadvantage for the player.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, as described above, the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode is set for each operating port, and the game times related to the first operating port 33 during the special gaming state (details are as follows). Even if (4 times) is executed, it is avoided that the high frequency support mode is terminated before the game times related to the second operating port 34 are executed.

Then, when the hold related to the first operating port 33 remains after the transition to the special gaming state, the variation display time of the pattern on the operating port display unit 43 is shortened so that the hold can be quickly consumed. One of the features is that it has a structure like this. Hereinafter, the relationship between each game state and the variable display mode, which is a mode for determining the variable display time of the pattern on the operating port display unit 43, will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 37.

<Variable display mode>
The variable display mode has a first variable display mode corresponding to the normal gaming state and the third special gaming state, and a second variable display mode corresponding to the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state. .. Considering that the normal game state and the third special game state correspond to the low frequency support mode, and the first special game state and the second special game state correspond to the high frequency support mode, the first variable display It can be said that the mode is a variable display mode corresponding to the low frequency support mode, and the second variable display mode is a variable display mode corresponding to the high frequency support mode.

In the first variable display mode, the variable display time of the pattern on the display unit AS for the first operating port is differentiated according to the game result (disengagement result, hit result), whereas for the second operating port. The variable display time of the pattern on the display unit BS is unified so as to be the same for all game results (disengagement result, hit result). Specifically, when the game times related to the first operating port 33 are out of order, the variable display time is configured to be 2 to 15 sec. Specifically, the variation display time is set to be shortened by increasing the amount of subsequent hold information related to the first operating port 33 at the start of the game round. The variable display time is configured to be 30 to 60 sec for a part of the case where the game times related to the first operating port 33 are the result of the deviation (disengagement reach) and the case where the game is the result of the hit. In the case of a hit result, a relatively long variable display time is likely to be selected, and in the case of a missed result, a relatively short variable display time is likely to be selected. On the other hand, the game times related to the second operating port 34 are configured so that the variable display time is 30 to 35 sec, and there is no difference depending on the game result.

Even in the second variable display mode, the variable display time of the pattern on the display unit AS for the first operating port is differentiated according to the game result (disengagement result, hit result), whereas it is for the second operating port. The variable display time of the pattern on the display unit BS is unified so as to be the same for all game results (disengagement result, hit result). Specifically, when the game times related to the first operating port 33 are out of order, the variable display time is configured to be 1 sec. On the other hand, when the game times related to the first operating port 33 are the winning results, the variable display time is configured to be 20 to 25 sec. Further, the game times related to the second operating port 34 are configured so that the variable display time is 20 to 25 sec regardless of whether the result is a loss or a hit result.

Next, the flow of the game will be illustrated with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 illustrates the flow of the game when the loop of the special game state ends before the limiter is activated after the transition from the normal game state to the special game state, and FIG. 39 shows the transition from the normal game state to the special game state. The flow of the game when the special game state until the limiter is activated later loops is illustrated.

In the example shown in FIG. 38, the jackpot (3R jackpot B) in the normal gaming state is triggered to shift to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the first special game corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the second variable display mode. It is transitioning to the state. When the game ball launched to the right route during the first special game state wins a prize in the second operating port 34, the game times related to the second operating port 34 are executed, and the second operating time is performed during the game times. Four pending information relating to the operating port 34 has been newly acquired.

Since the current game times executed in the first special game state correspond to the out-of-game result, the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the first variable display mode is accompanied by the end of the first special game state. Has moved to. In the third special game state, one of the remaining reserved information related to the second operating port 34 corresponds to the special hit result, and the special hit result is triggered to shift to the special hit game state. A V prize is generated in this special hit game state, and the V prize is triggered to shift to the V jackpot game state.

After the end of the V jackpot game state, the state shifts to the first special game state again. The first special game state of this time also corresponds to the disengaged result, and all the remaining reserved information related to the second operating port 34 also corresponds to the disengaged result. Therefore, after the transition to the first special gaming state, the normal gaming state is restored via the third special gaming state.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 39, the jackpot (3R jackpot B) in the normal gaming state is triggered to shift to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the high frequency support mode and the second variable display mode are supported. 1 It has shifted to the special game state. When the game ball launched to the right route during the first special game state wins a prize in the second operating port 34, the game times related to the second operating port 34 are executed, and the second operating time is performed during the game times. Four pending information relating to the operating port 34 has been newly acquired.

This game, which is executed in the first special game state, corresponds to the special hit result. After the end of the first special game state, the game shifts to the special hit game state, and when a V prize is generated in this special hit game state, the player shifts to the V jackpot game state.

After the end of the V jackpot game state, the state shifts to the second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the second variable display mode. Regarding the second special game state, the end reference number of times is 100 times, and the hit probability related to the second operating port 34 is 1/3, so that the next hit in the second special game state is substantially rich. It becomes. After that, the flow of the special hit game state → the V jackpot game state → the second special game state is looped until the number of consecutive hits = the upper limit and the limiter is activated.

When the number of consecutive hits including the first jackpot reaches the upper limit of 4, the transition destination after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the first variable display mode, which is high. Out of the benefits of frequency support. In the third special game state, the game proceeds based on the remaining hold information (hold information related to the second operating port 34) acquired during the second special game state. In the example shown in FIG. 39, all the game times executed during the third special game state correspond to the off result, and the normal game state is based on the fact that all the reserved information related to the second operation port 34 has been digested. Has returned to.

In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the game effect (hereinafter referred to as the effect mode) by the symbol display device 41, the speaker unit 64, and the display light emitting unit 63 is switched according to the game state. For each effect mode, the image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the BGM and sound effects output by the speaker unit 64, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 63 are defined for each game state. Hereinafter, the outline of the effect in each game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. 40 and 41 are schematic views showing the display screen G in each gaming state.

<Outline of production>
As described above, in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the first variable display mode, the game progresses centering on the game times related to the first operating port 33. In this normal game state, the game progresses in the normal production mode. In the normal effect mode, the symbol displayed on the display screen G corresponds to the game times related to the first operating port 33. That is, on the display screen G, the scroll display (variable display) of the symbols is started at the start of the game round related to the first operating port 33, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped at the end of the game round. Is displayed.

When a big hit is made in the normal game state, the symbol combination corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the effective line, and then the game shifts to the big hit game state. The symbol combination displayed as stopped is common to the 3R jackpot A and the 3R jackpot B, and it is difficult to specify which jackpot is from the symbol combination.

In the jackpot game state, the effect mode is switched from the normal effect mode to the jackpot effect mode. In the jackpot production mode, the production during the jackpot game progresses in the order of opening → round game → ending as the game progresses. Especially for the ending at the time of the first hit, the content differs depending on the type of jackpot. The ending for 3R jackpot A is composed of a result notification part indicating the type of jackpot, whereas the ending for 3R jackpot B is composed of the above result notification part indicating the type of jackpot and the first special game state. It consists of an introduction part to the challenge production to be executed.

In the result notification part, an image of a girl is displayed in the center of the display screen G, and the type of jackpot is notified depending on the success or failure of the transformation of this girl. Specifically, when the jackpot this time is 3R jackpot A (that is, the jackpot result that does not correspond to the transition of the high frequency support mode), the jackpot game state ends after the image showing the transformation failure is displayed. Return to the normal game state. With the return to the normal game state, the effect mode is switched from the jackpot effect mode to the above normal effect mode.

If the jackpot this time is 3R jackpot B (that is, the jackpot result corresponding to the transition to the high frequency support mode), the ending will proceed from the result notification part to the challenge production introduction part after the image showing the transformation success is displayed. .. Then, with the transition to the first special game state, the effect mode is switched from the jackpot effect mode to the first special effect mode corresponding to the first special effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the first special effect mode, the chase between the girl and the fairy after the successful transformation is started in accordance with the start of the game round related to the second operating port 34. When the game times correspond to a special hit or a big hit, the image of capturing the fairy is displayed and the symbol combination of "V" is stopped and displayed. After that, by shifting to the second special gaming state, the effect mode also corresponds to the second special gaming state. The effect modes in the second special game state include the second special effect mode and the continuous effect mode set when a special condition (for example, all the following four holds are hit results) is satisfied during the first special game state. Is provided.

In the second special effect mode, a red effect is additionally displayed on the outer edge portion of the display screen G, and the characters "Super RUSH" are additionally displayed on the upper part of the display screen G. By these displays, the player is instructed that the second special gaming state is in effect. On the other hand, in the continuous effect mode, the image of the girl is displayed in the center of the display screen G, the singing effect is executed, and the characters "Seven RUSH" are additionally displayed on the upper part of the display screen G. The continuous effect mode is an effect mode in which the transition is substantially made only when seven hits are confirmed, and this continuous effect mode is continued until the seven hit games are completed. That is, the continuous production mode is a production mode in which a series of singing productions are executed across each of the special game state, the special hit game state, and the V jackpot game state, and the production period is longer than that of the other production modes. This is the secured production mode. By executing such a series of singing effects, it is possible to prevent the period from being halfway in executing the singing effects.

If the game times executed in the first special game state do not correspond to either the special hit or the big hit (if it is out of the game), the image of the fairy being missed is displayed and the word "failure" is displayed. Is displayed. After that, the effect mode is also switched to the third special effect mode corresponding to the third special game state by the transition to the third special game state.

In the third special effect mode, a blue effect is additionally displayed on the outer edge portion of the display screen G, and the characters "RUSH" are additionally displayed on the upper part of the display screen G. By these displays, the player is instructed that the third special gaming state is in effect.

In the present embodiment, the launch destination (right route / left route) of the game ball that is advantageous to the player changes depending on the game state, or the launch timing of the preferred game ball differs. In view of such circumstances, the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 is configured to execute a process for guiding the firing operation in accordance with the process for the effect in each gaming state. Here, various processes executed as a part of the periodic process by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 will be described. First, the special ending process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The special ending process is a process executed during the jackpot game state in which the jackpot result is transferred in the normal game state.

<Special ending processing>
In the special ending process, first, it is determined in step S1801 whether or not a jackpot ending command has been received from the main control device 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process proceeds to step S1802. In step S1802, the ending start process is executed. In the ending start processing, the ending command, specifically the ending command received from the main control device 81, with information indicating the outline of the ending effect added, is transmitted to the display control device 212, and the speaker unit 64 sends the ending command for the ending. The output of the BGM is started, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is switched to the light emitting mode for the ending. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to start the display effect (moving image) for the ending based on the instruction by the ending command.

When the ending is started, the first variable winning device 32A is already closed. Therefore, if the game ball is continuously fired toward the right route even after the ending is started, the number of balls held will be reduced. In consideration of such circumstances, the game machine shown in the present embodiment is provided with a function for notifying the player whether or not the game ball should be launched to the right route. In the following description, the notification that the game ball should be launched to the right route is simply referred to as "right-handed notification".

The right-handed notification mode is roughly classified into two modes. For details, the right-handed notification (large) (see FIGS. 43 (a) and 43 (b)) in which the right-handed notification is displayed large in the center of the display screen G and the right-handed notification are displayed in the corner of the display screen G. It is roughly divided into a right-handed notification (small) (see FIG. 43 (c)), which is displayed small in. When the right-handed notification (large) is executed, "right-handed start" is output as a message prompting the speaker unit 64 to shoot the game ball toward the right route.

In the jackpot game state, the right-handed notification (large) is executed immediately before the transition from the opening to the round game, and after that, the right-handed notification (large) is executed so as not to interfere with the jackpot video displayed during the round game. ) Ends and right-handed notification (small) starts.

Returning to the description of FIG. 42, after executing the ending start process in step S1802, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1802, the right-handed notification (small) end process is executed. In the right-handed notification (small) end processing, a right-handed notification (small) end command is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 hides the image for right-handed notification (small) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 based on the reception of the right-handed notification (small) end command. As a result, right-handed notification is avoided during the result notification part that constitutes the ending. After executing the process of step S1803, the process for the special ending is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if the ending command for the jackpot has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the result notification part is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state this time is the jackpot result (3R jackpot result B) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, that is, the high frequency after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is determined whether or not it is the timing for notifying whether or not to shift to the first special gaming state corresponding to the support mode (win / fail result notification timing). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1806, the pass / fail result notification process is executed, and then the special ending process ends. In the pass / fail result notification process, the display control device 212 outputs a pass / fail result notification command, the speaker unit 64 outputs a sound effect for the pass / fail result notification, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is the light emission mode for the pass / fail result notification. Switch to.

If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the challenge effect introduction part. As described above, the ending part of the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the 3R jackpot result A is composed of the result notification part, while the ending part of the jackpot gaming state corresponding to the 3R jackpot result B covers the first half of the ending. It is composed of a result notification part that composes and a challenge production introduction part that composes the latter half. If a negative determination is made in step S1807, the special ending process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, the process for introducing the challenge effect is executed in step S1808, and then the special ending process is terminated. In the transition process to the challenge effect introduction part, the display control device 212 outputs the challenge effect introduction part transfer command, the speaker unit 64 outputs the BGM for the challenge effect introduction part, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is challenged. Switch to the light emission mode for the production introduction part.

Returning to the description of step S1804, if a negative determination is made in step S1804, that is, if the result notification part is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the challenge effect introduction part is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1809, the special ending process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the right-handed notification (large). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, the right-handed notification (large) start process is executed in step S1811, and then the special ending process is terminated.

In the right-handed notification (large) start process in step S1811, the display control device 212 outputs the right-handed notification (large) start command, and the speaker unit 64 outputs a right-handed notification (large) message. The display control device 212 displays an image for right-handed notification (large) on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 (see FIG. 43 (a)) based on the reception of the right-handed notification (large) start command. To do. This right-handed notification (large) is continued until the game round related to the second operating port 34 is started after the transition to the first special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. When shifting from the normal gaming state to the first special gaming state via the jackpot gaming state, the number of pending information related to the second operating port 34 is 0 in most of the cases. For this reason, the right-handed notification (large) started during the challenge production introduction part is not released immediately after the transition to the first special game state, but is held information by winning a prize in the second operating port 34. Will continue until is acquired.

Returning to the description of step S1810, if a negative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if it is not the start timing of the right-handed notification (large), the process proceeds to step S1812. In step S1812, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending. If a negative determination is made in step S1812, the special ending process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1812, the challenge effect start process is executed in step S1813, and then the special ending process is terminated. In the challenge effect start process, the challenge effect start command is output to the display control device 212, the output of the BGM corresponding to the challenge effect (specifically, the standby part) is started from the speaker unit 64, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is changed. Switch to the light emission mode corresponding to the challenge production (details are the standby part). Based on the reception of the challenge effect start command, the display control device 212 starts the moving image display for the challenge effect on the symbol display device 41, specifically, the moving image display for the standby part (see FIG. 40).

The challenge effect shifts from the standby part, which is executed until the game round based on the winning of the second operating port 34 is started, and the waiting part, which is executed according to the start of the game round based on the winning of the second operating port 34. It is composed of the main part to be used. Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44, the first special effect mode process, which is a process for executing the challenge effect, will be described. The first special effect mode process is a process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 as a part of the periodic process.

<Processing for the 1st special production mode>
In the process for the first special effect mode, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the main part of the challenge effect is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether or not one of the fluctuation start command for the first operating port 33 and the fluctuation start command for the second operating port 34 corresponding to the big hit or the special hit is received. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the first special effect mode process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the end process of the standby part is executed in step S1903, and the transition process to the main part of the challenge effect is executed in the subsequent step S1904.

In the transition process to the main part, the main part start command is output to the display control device 212 to start the output of the BGM corresponding to the main part from the speaker unit 64, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 corresponds to the main part. Switch to the light emitting mode. Based on the reception of the main part start command, the display control device 212 switches from the moving image display for the challenge effect and the moving image display for the standby part in the symbol display device 41 to the moving image display for the main part.

After that, the right-handed notification (large) end processing is executed in step S1905, the right-handed notification (small) start processing is executed in step S1906, and then the first special effect mode processing is ended.

Returning to the description of step S1901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation end command has been received from the main control device 81. If a negative determination is made in step S1907, the challenge effect progress process is executed in step S1908 to end the process for the first special effect mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, the challenge effect end process is executed in step S1909, and then the first special effect mode process ends. Here, the challenge effect progress process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 45 to 50.

<Progress processing for challenge production>
The challenge production is roughly divided into the first half part until the success or failure of the challenge production is notified and the second half part after notifying the success or failure of the challenge production, and the progress processing for the challenge production is the processing for the first half part (FIG. 45). It is composed of step S2001) and processing for the latter half part (step S2002 in FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 46, in the first half part processing, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the first half part is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the processing for the first half of this part is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the step-up effect constituting the main part is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the processing for the first half of this part is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the result of the challenge effect, that is, whether or not the winning or failing result indicating whether or not the game time being executed is a hit result (special hit result or big hit result) is being notified. .. In the challenge production, as a result of the challenge production, if it is a special hit result or a big hit result, a display indicating the success of the challenge production (display that captures the fairy) is displayed, and if it is a miss result, the challenge production is displayed. A display indicating failure (display in which the fairy is missed) is displayed (see FIG. 41).

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether or not it is the notification timing of the hit / fail result. If a negative determination is made in step S2104, the first half part processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, the pass / fail result notification process is executed in step S2105, and then the first half part process is terminated.

In the notification process of step S2105, a result notification command is output to the display control device 212 in order to notify the success / failure result of the game times prior to the final display of the pattern on the operation port display unit 43, and the success / failure is output from the speaker unit 64. The sound effect corresponding to the result is output, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is switched to the light emitting mode corresponding to the result of success or failure. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 in order to clearly indicate the result of success or failure based on the reception of the result notification command.

Returning to the description of step S2103, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the result of success or failure is being notified, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether or not it is the transition timing to the latter half part. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the first half part processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process for shifting to the latter half part is executed in step S2107, and then the process for the first half part is terminated. Here, the transition process to the latter half part will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

In the transition process to the second half part, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the game result (win / fail result) of the current game times is a hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the continuous hit count calculation process is executed in step S2202, the hit result corresponding effect start process is executed in the subsequent step S2203, and then the transition process is terminated. Details of the continuous hit count calculation process and the start of the hit result corresponding effect will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the disengagement result corresponding effect start process is executed in step S2204. In the disengagement result corresponding effect start processing, the disengaged result corresponding effect start command is output to the display control device 212, the sound effect for the disengaged result corresponding effect is output from the speaker unit 64, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is deviated from the result. Switch to the light emission mode for production. The display control device 212 hides the image of the girl character and the fairy being displayed and the character of the failure based on the reception of the command to start the effect corresponding to the disengagement result, and shifts to the third special game state on the display screen G. A process is performed to dynamically display the characters "RUSH", which is an image showing the transition of.

After that, in step S2205, it is determined whether or not the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the main transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, the right-handed notification (small) end process is executed, and then the main transition process is ended. That is, if the number of games held this time corresponds to the result of the game being missed and the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit, all right-handed notifications are terminated at this point. ..

In the present embodiment, the success / failure of the challenge production is notified to the player in the first half part of the challenge production, and if the challenge production is successful, a jackpot that can occur after that (substantially becomes rich). One of the features is that the number of times, that is, the number of consecutive hits is notified to the player in the latter half part. Here, the number of consecutive jackpots is calculated based on the remaining hold information related to the second operating port 34. Hereinafter, before the continuous hit count calculation process is described, it is executed as a part of the process that is the premise of the calculation process, specifically, the winning process for the operating port (see FIG. 20) in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81. The pre-confirmation process of step S206 and step S213 to be performed will be described. First, the pre-confirmation process for the first operating port in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

<Preliminary confirmation process>
In the pre-confirmation process for the first operating port, first, the hit / fail confirmation process is performed with reference to the hit / fail determination table for the first operating port in step S2301 and the value of the hit random number counter C1 acquired in step S205. .. Since the confirmation process in step S2301 is the same process as the pass / fail determination process in step S602 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is confirmed in the pass / fail confirmation process of step S2301 that the pending information corresponds to the jackpot result, an affirmative decision is made in step S2302 and the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, the jackpot type is confirmed by referring to the jackpot type table for the first operating port and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in step S205. Since the type confirmation process in step S2303 is the same process as the type determination process in step S606 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2304, and in step S207, the process of storing the jackpot information in the first hold command to be transmitted is executed, and the pre-confirmation process is completed.

Returning to the description of step S2302, if a negative determination is made in step S2302, that is, if the current hold information does not correspond to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2305. If the pending information this time corresponds to the special hit result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2305 and the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, the special hit type is confirmed by referring to the special hit type table for the first operating port and the value of the special hit type counter C3 acquired in step S205. Since the type confirmation process in step S2306 is the same process as the type determination process in step S612 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2307, and in step S207, the process of storing the special hit information in the first hold command scheduled to be transmitted is executed, and the pre-confirmation process is completed.

If the pending information does not correspond to either the jackpot result or the special hit result, that is, if it corresponds to the missed result, a negative determination is made in step S2305 and the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, it is determined whether or not the current variable display mode is the first variable display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2308, the pre-confirmation process ends as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, the reach confirmation process is performed with reference to the deviation reach determination table and the value of the variation type counter CS acquired in step S205. That is, the presence or absence of the out-of-reach and the outline of the out-of-reach occurrence are confirmed.

When it is confirmed that the detachment reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S2310, and the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the process of storing the information indicating the outline of the out-of-reach occurrence in the first hold command scheduled to be transmitted in step S207 is executed, and the pre-confirmation process is completed.

Next, the pre-confirmation process for the second operating port in step S213 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49.

In the pre-confirmation process for the second operating port, first, the winning / failing confirmation process is performed with reference to the hit / fail determination table for the second operating port in step S2401 and the value of the hit random number counter C1 acquired in step S212. .. Since the confirmation process in step S2401 is the same process as the pass / fail determination process in step S603 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is confirmed in the pass / fail confirmation process of step S2401 that the pending information corresponds to the jackpot result, an affirmative decision is made in step S2402 and the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S2403, the jackpot type is confirmed by referring to the jackpot type table for the second operating port and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in step S212. Since the type confirmation process in step S2403 is the same process as the type determination process in step S607 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2404, and in step S214, the process of storing the jackpot information in the second hold command scheduled to be transmitted is executed, and the pre-confirmation process is completed.

Returning to the description of step S2402, if a negative determination is made in step S2402, that is, if the current hold information does not correspond to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2405. If the pending information this time corresponds to the special hit result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2405 and the process proceeds to step S2406. In step S2406, the special hit type is confirmed by referring to the special hit type table for the second operating port and the value of the special hit type counter C3 acquired in step S212. Since the type confirmation process in step S2406 is the same process as the type determination process in step S613 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2407, and in step S212, the process of storing the special hit information in the first hold command scheduled to be transmitted is executed, and the pre-confirmation process is completed.

If the pending information this time does not correspond to either the jackpot result or the special hit result, that is, if it corresponds to the missed result, a negative judgment is made in step S2405, and the pre-confirmation process is performed as it is. finish.

Here, the continuous hit count calculation process in step S2202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the continuous hit count calculation process, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port is confirmed in the order of the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area, and the hold information is continuously hit. Identify the number of times. The number of consecutive hits in the present embodiment indicates the number of consecutive hits in a loop from the first special gaming state to the third special gaming state without shifting to the normal gaming state.

<Processing for calculating the number of consecutive hits>
In the process of calculating the number of consecutive hits, first, in step S2501, the hold to be determined is specified. That is, the determination target is limited to the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port at the timing when the continuous hit count calculation process is executed. Then, the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port is set as the threshold value M, and "1" is set in the determination continuation counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 244.

In the following step S2502, it is determined whether or not the value n of the determination continuation counter matches the threshold value M. If a negative determination is made in step S2502, the gaming state when the nth gaming round is executed in step S2503 is specified. In the following step S2504, the winning / failing result of the nth game round is specified from the hold information. After that, in step S2505, the gaming state when the n + 1st gaming round is executed is specified. Then, in step S2506, the value n of the determination continuation counter is updated to n + 1, and the process returns to step S2502. That is, when the present calculation process is started, the state is specified and the pass / fail result is specified in order for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, that is, if the value n of the determination continuation counter matches the threshold value M, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, the transition of the gaming state after the hold digestion related to the second operating port 34 is estimated based on the specific results of steps S2503 to S2505. In the following step S2508, the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated after the pending digestion is specified. After that, in step S2509, the number of consecutive hits is estimated based on the information specified and estimated in steps S2503 to S2508, and in step S2501, the determination continuation counter is cleared to "0", and the process of calculating the number of consecutive hits is completed.

In each game round related to the second operating port 34, the winning result is about 1/3, and 100 times are set as the end reference number (time reduction number) in the second special game state. In other words, in the second special game state, although it is assumed that the winning result will almost certainly be obtained before the end reference number of times is reached, although the probability is extremely low, all the games that are continuously executed in the second special game state are executed. We cannot deny the possibility that the game times will be missed. In consideration of such uncertainties, each process of steps S2507 and S2509 in the continuous per-number calculation process is designated as an "estimation" process. That is, the calculation result in the continuous hit count calculation process is an estimated value including an estimation element.

Hereinafter, the outline of the calculation of the number of consecutive hits will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. 51 to 53 are schematic views showing the relationship between the stored information on hold and the number of consecutive hits. In each of the examples shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the game times being executed are the first game times in which the normal game state is changed to the special game state, and the holding area Ra for the first operating port is set. Indicates a case where the hold corresponding to the winning result is not stored. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, at the time of transition to the first special gaming state, the hold for the winning result corresponding to the first operating port 33 remains, and the holding precedes the game times related to the second operating port 34. When it is executed, the number of consecutive jackpots is estimated → the notification is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 51, when the above calculation is performed, all the first to fourth areas of the holding area Rb for the second operating port are filled, and the game times being executed (stored in the execution area AE). The case where both the holding) and the subsequent game times (holding stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port) correspond to the winning result is illustrated. In this case, the game times being executed are in the first special game state, and at the start of the game times, the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is three times. If a winning result is obtained in the first special game state, the transition to the second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode will be triggered by the above V winning. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode.

The winning result also corresponds to the first game round executed after the game round. This game is executed under the high frequency support mode. By winning the result in the high frequency support mode, the second game will be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. The winning result is also supported for the second game. This game is executed under the high frequency support mode. By winning the result in the high frequency support mode, the number of consecutive hits becomes 4 times, which is the upper limit, and the limiter operates. As a result, the third game is executed in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

In the example of FIG. 51, the winning result is also corresponded to the third game round, and the winning result is obtained in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, so that the fourth game round is the first special game state. Will be executed at. In addition, the limiter is reset based on the winning result. The winning result is also supported for the 4th game, and the winning result is obtained in the 1st special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, so that the subsequent game times are the 2nd special game corresponding to the high frequency support mode. It will be executed in the state. At this point, the number of times remaining until the limiter is activated is two, so that the remaining two hits are substantially generated. In this case, it is estimated that two hits will be generated in the fifth and subsequent game times for which the hold has not been acquired yet, and seven consecutive hits will be generated including the hit in the corresponding game time being executed. That is, it is presumed that continuous hits exceeding the upper limit number of times by the limiter occur because the hits after the limiter is activated are refrained.

In each of the examples shown in FIG. 52, it is unknown whether a hit occurs after the limiter is activated. In other words, although it is rich that the hits continue until the limiter is activated, it is unclear whether the hits will occur between the limiter activation and the transition to the normal gaming state.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (a), the hold is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operating port. That is, it is unclear whether or not the subsequent game times to be executed after the end of the corresponding game times. However, after the end of the corresponding game round, the game shifts to the second special game state triggered by the V prize, and the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is also two times. That is, even if the subsequent hold is not acquired, it is rich that two hits occur during the second special game state. Under these circumstances, it is estimated that after the end of the game, the hits will continue until the limiter is activated. That is, the number of consecutive hits including the corresponding game times is estimated to be three times.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (b), although the hold is stored in the first area of the hold area Rb for the second operating port, this hold corresponds to the disengagement result. After the end of the corresponding game round, the game shifts to the second special game state triggered by the V prize, and the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is also two times. In other words, even if the game is missed in the first game after the corresponding game, the second special game state is continued, the remaining number of times until the end reference number is reached is 99 times, and the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is 2 times. ing. Therefore, even if the subsequent hold is not acquired, it is rich that two hits occur during the second special game state. Under these circumstances, it is estimated that after the end of the game, the hits will continue until the limiter is activated. That is, the number of consecutive hits including the corresponding game times is estimated to be three times.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (c), although the hold is stored in the first area to the fourth area of the hold area Rb for the second operation port, all of these hold correspond to the off result. .. After the end of the corresponding game round, the game shifts to the second special game state triggered by the V prize, and the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is also two times. That is, even if the game is missed in the first to fourth game times after the corresponding game time, the second special game state is continued, the remaining number of times until the end reference number is reached is 96 times, and the remaining number of hits until the limiter is activated is 2. It has become a time. Therefore, even if the subsequent hold is not acquired, it is rich that two hits occur during the second special game state. Under these circumstances, it is estimated that after the end of the game, the hits will continue until the limiter is activated. That is, the number of consecutive hits including the corresponding game times is estimated to be three times.

In the example shown in FIG. 52 (d), the hold is stored in the first area to the fourth area of the hold area Rb for the second operating port, and the hold in the third area corresponds to the winning result. After the end of the corresponding game round, the game shifts to the second special game state triggered by the V prize, and the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is also two times. After the first game round and the second game round result in a loss, the third game round results in a winning result. As a result, the fourth game round is executed in the second special game state in which the end reference number of times is reset to 100 times. The fourth game round corresponds to the out-of-game result, and the subsequent game rounds are executed under the second special game state. Here, in the fifth game round, the remaining number of times until the end reference number of times is reached is 98 times, and the remaining number of hits until the limiter operation is one. Therefore, even if the subsequent hold is not acquired, it is rich that one hit occurs during the second special game state. Under these circumstances, it is estimated that after the end of the game, the hits will continue until the limiter is activated. That is, the number of consecutive hits including the corresponding game times is estimated to be three times.

In each of the examples shown in FIG. 53, it is unclear whether or not a hit occurs after the limiter is activated. In other words, although it is rich that the hits continue until the limiter is activated, it is unclear whether the hits will occur between the limiter activation and the transition to the normal gaming state.

In the example shown in FIG. 53A, when the above calculation is performed, all the first to fourth areas of the holding area Rb for the second operating port are filled, and the game times being executed (stored in the execution area AE). (Holded), the first game (hold stored in the first area), the second game (hold stored in the second area), and the third executed after the corresponding game. When all of the game times (holds stored in the 3rd area) correspond to the winning result, and the 4th game times (holds stored in the 4th area) correspond to the out-of-game results. Is illustrated. In this case, the game times being executed are in the first special game state, and at the start of the game times, the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is three times. If a winning result is obtained in the first special game state, the transition to the second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode will be triggered by the above V winning. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode.

The first game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. By winning the result in the high frequency support mode, the second game will be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. The second game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is also executed under the high frequency support mode. However, when the winning result is obtained under the high frequency support mode, the number of consecutive hits becomes four times, which is the upper limit, and the limiter operates. As a result, the third game is executed in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

In the example of FIG. 53 (a), the winning result is also corresponded to the third game round, and the winning result is obtained in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, so that the fourth game round is the first. It will be executed in a special game state. In addition, the limiter is reset based on the winning result. However, the fourth game round corresponds to the out-of-game result, and the winning result is not obtained in the first special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. After that, it shifts to the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. In such a case, the number of consecutive hits may differ depending on whether or not the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 results in a winning result. However, at the timing of performing the above calculation, the hold related to the fifth and subsequent game times has not been acquired. Therefore, in such a case, the number of consecutive hits including the corresponding game times is estimated to be four times.

In the example shown in FIG. 53B, when the above calculation is performed, all the first to fourth areas of the holding area Rb for the second operating port are filled, and the game times being executed (stored in the execution area AE). (Hold), the first game (hold stored in the first area), the second game (hold stored in the second area), and the fourth, which are executed after the corresponding game. When all of the game times (holds stored in the 3rd area) correspond to the winning result, and the 3rd game times (holds stored in the 4th area) correspond to the out-of-game results. Is illustrated. In this case, the game times being executed are in the first special game state, and at the start of the game times, the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is three times. If a winning result is obtained in the first special game state, the transition to the second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode will be triggered by the above V winning. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode.

The first game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. By winning the result in the high frequency support mode, the second game will be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. The second game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is also executed under the high frequency support mode. However, when the winning result is obtained under the high frequency support mode, the number of consecutive hits becomes four times, which is the upper limit, and the limiter operates. As a result, the third game is executed in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

In the example of FIG. 53 (b), the third game round corresponds to the missed result, and the fourth game round corresponds to the first game round because the missed result is obtained in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. It will be executed in a special game state. However, the fourth game round corresponds to the winning result, and the fifth game round is executed in the first special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. And the limiter will also be reset. In such a case, the number of consecutive hits may differ depending on whether or not the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 results in a winning result. However, at the timing of performing the above calculation, the hold related to the fifth and subsequent game times has not been acquired. Therefore, in such a case, the number of consecutive hits including the corresponding game times is estimated to be four times.

In the example shown in FIG. 53 (c), when the above calculation is performed, all the first to fourth areas of the holding area Rb for the second operating port are filled, and the game times being executed (stored in the execution area AE). (Hold), the first game (hold stored in the first area), the third game (hold stored in the second area), and the fourth, which are executed after the corresponding game. When all of the game times (holds stored in the third area) correspond to the winning result, and the second game times (holds stored in the fourth area) correspond to the missed result. Is illustrated. In this case, the game times being executed are in the first special game state, and at the start of the game times, the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is three times. If a winning result is obtained in the first special game state, the transition to the second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode will be triggered by the above V winning. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode.

The first game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. By winning the result in the high frequency support mode, the second game will be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. The second game round corresponds to the out-of-game result, and the remaining number of times until the end reference number of times is reached is reduced by "1" to move to the third game round. That is, the third game is also executed under the high frequency support mode. At this time, the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is also inherited from the second game round to the third game round.

Although the third game round corresponds to the winning result, the limiter is activated, so that the fourth game round will be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. .. Since the fourth game round corresponds to the winning result, the limiter is reset and the game shifts to the first special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. In such a case, the number of consecutive hits may differ depending on whether or not the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 results in a winning result. However, at the timing of performing the above calculation, the hold related to the fifth and subsequent game times has not been acquired. Therefore, in such a case, the number of consecutive hits including the corresponding game times is estimated to be four times.

In the example shown in FIG. 53 (d), when the above calculation is performed, all the first to fourth areas of the holding area Rb for the second operating port are filled, and the game times being executed (stored in the execution area AE). (Hold), the second game (hold stored in the first area), the third game (hold stored in the second area), and the fourth, which are executed after the corresponding game. When all of the game times (holds stored in the third area) correspond to the winning result, and the first game times (holds stored in the fourth area) correspond to the out-of-game results. Is illustrated. In this case, the game times being executed are in the first special game state, and at the start of the game times, the number of remaining hits until the limiter is activated is three times. If a winning result is obtained in the first special game state, the transition to the second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode will be triggered by the above V winning. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode.

The first game round corresponds to the off result, and this game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the remaining number of times until the end reference number of times is reached is reduced by "1" to move to the second game time. That is, the second game is also executed under the high frequency support mode. The second game round corresponds to the winning result, and if the winning result is obtained under the high frequency support mode, the third game round will also be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. Will be. The third game round corresponds to the winning result, and although it is released as the winning result under the high frequency support mode, the limiter is activated and the fourth game round corresponds to the low frequency support mode third special It will be executed in the game state.

The fourth game round corresponds to the winning result, and the limiter is reset and the game shifts to the first special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. In such a case, the number of consecutive hits may differ depending on whether or not the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 results in a winning result. However, at the timing of performing the above calculation, the hold related to the fifth and subsequent game times has not been acquired. Therefore, in such a case, the number of consecutive hits including the corresponding game times is estimated to be four times.

Next, the processing for the latter half part constituting the challenge effect progress processing (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54.

<Processing for the second half part>
In the processing for the latter half part, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the latter half part is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the processing for the latter half of the present is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a game round corresponding to the outlier result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process for the off result is executed in step S2603, and then the process for the latter half of the present is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2602, the hit result processing is executed in step S2604, and then the latter half part processing is terminated.

<Processing for missing results>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, in the deviation result processing, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the introduction effect of the third special effect mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the processing for the result of the loss is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2702. In step S2702, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the introduction effect of the third special effect mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2702, the processing for the result of the loss is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit of four. That is, it is determined whether or not further pending acquisition is impossible. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704, the start process of starting the introduction effect A as the introduction effect to the third special effect mode is executed, and then the right-handed notification (large) is performed in step S2705. After executing the delayed start processing of), the processing for the result of this loss is terminated. In the introduction effect A, the characters "RUSH" indicating the transition to the third special effect mode are dynamically displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 at the center of the display screen G. Then, after the character "RUSH" is reduced and displayed on the upper part of the display screen G, an image of a girl character holding a sign with a right arrow is dynamically displayed in the center of the display screen G, and the display screen G is displayed. An indicator indicating the remaining time and a timer counter are displayed at the lower part of (see FIG. 56).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2706, the start process of starting the introduction effect B as the introduction effect to the third special effect mode is executed, and then the process for the result of the deviation is ended. In the introduction effect A, the image of the seaside is dynamically displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Note that, unlike the introduction effect A, the right-handed notification is not executed.

Next, the winning result processing in step S2604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 57.

<Processing for winning results>
In the hit result processing, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the introduction effect of the second special effect mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, it is determined whether or not the winning number suggestion effect is being produced. If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2803. In step S2803, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the winning number suggestion effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2803, the final result processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, the winning number suggestion effect start processing is executed in step S2804, and then the winning result processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S2802, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2805 to determine whether or not it is time to start the introduction effect of the second special effect mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, the processing for the true selection result is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the process for starting the introduction effect of the second special effect mode is executed in step S2806, and then the process for the final result is ended.

Returning to the description of step S2801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2807. In step S2807, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the right-handed notification (large). If a negative determination is made in step S2807, the final result processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2807, the right-handed notification (large) start process is executed in step S2808, and then the final hit result process ends.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, an outline of the winning number suggestion effect and the right-handed notification will be described. In the winning number suggestion effect, for example, when the calculation result (estimation result) of the number of consecutive hits is 3 times, FIG. 58 (a) → FIG. 58 (b) → FIG. 58 (c) → FIG. 58 (d) → The production proceeds in the order of FIG. 58 (e). For example, when the calculation result (estimation result) of the number of consecutive hits is 7 times, FIG. 58 (a) → FIG. 58 (b) → FIG. 58 (c) → FIG. The production proceeds in the order of 58 (d) → FIG. 58 (f) → FIG. 58 (g) → FIG. 58 (h).

In the first special effect mode (first special game state), the combination of "V" symbols is stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 when the winning result is notified. In the winning number suggestion effect, the "V" symbol is sequentially shifted to the stock number suggestion area provided on the right side of the display screen G. By this shift, the stock number display in the stock number suggestion region is updated (added) in the order of “V × 1” → “V × 2” → “V × 3”. In this way, when all the "V" symbols that have been stopped and displayed have been shifted, the number of stocks will be displayed as "V x 3", and the player will be informed that the number of consecutive hits will be 3 or more. It will be suggested.

As mentioned above, the actual number of consecutive hits will be greatly influenced by the remaining hold. In line with this, in the winning number suggestion effect, the effect is branched according to the calculation result (estimation result) of the number of consecutive hits. Specifically, when the above calculation result is 3 times, the display of "V × 3" is not updated, and after the hit game state, the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode is entered. Transition. On the other hand, when the above calculation result is 4 times or 7 times, the "V" symbol is redisplayed in the center of the display screen G and the stock number display is also enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen G. To. Then, by updating (adding) the stock number display, the number of consecutive hits is suggested to the player. After that, it shifts to the second special game state corresponding to the continuous production mode through the hit game state.

Here, in the case of transitioning from the first special gaming state to the winning gaming state, the right to notify the player that the situation should be aimed at V prize after the winning number suggestion effect is executed in the latter half part. The hit notification is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59, an image of a girl holding a sign with a right arrow is dynamically displayed in the center of the display screen G, and an indicator indicating the remaining time is displayed at the bottom of the display screen G. The arrow. Regarding the update speed (movement speed) of the current position in this indicator, the update speed is the same as that of the right-handed notification (large) indicator when the second operating port 34 is prompted to win a prize as a result of disconnection. However, the overall length of the indicator is shorter because the update period of the indicator is shorter than the update period of the right-handed notification (large) indicator when the second operating port 34 is prompted to win a prize as a result of disconnection. (See FIG. 43). This is a device to prevent the player from misunderstanding the remaining time indicated by the indicator.

<Flow of the game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the flow of the game will be supplementarily described. FIG. 60 shows a timing showing the flow of the game when the number of games held in the first special game state corresponds to the hit result and the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit before the notification of success or failure. It is a chart.

At the timing of ta1, the variable winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and shifts from the round game to the ending. In the ending, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state this time is notified (clarified) to the player in the result notification part. After that, the notification ends at the timing of ta2, and the introduction effect for the challenge effect executed in the first special game state, which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state, is executed. At the timing of ta3 during this introduction effect (challenge effect introduction part), the right-handed notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the first special gaming state.

At the timing of the following ta4, the jackpot game state ends and the game shifts to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, and when the game ball wins a prize in the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 frequently changes from the closed state to the open state. It will be switched. The challenge effect is started with the transition to the first special gaming state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not secured, so until the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs. The waiting part of the challenge production is executed. Right-handed notification (large) will continue even in this standby part.

At the timing of ta5 when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs after the transition to the first special gaming state, the challenge production shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as an opportunity. In addition, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small) triggered by the winning. In the example shown in FIG. 60, since the launch of the game ball is continued even after the right-handed notification (large) is completed at the timing of ta5, the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 at the timing of ta6. Has reached the upper limit (4 pieces).

At the timing of ta7 in which the challenge production is in progress, the player is notified of the result of winning or failing the game. That is, the result of success or failure is clearly shown on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43. After that, at the timing of ta8, the number of consecutive hits (number of wins) including the hit result in the current game round is suggested to the player.

At the timing of the following ta9, the right-handed notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the special hit game state, and the player is urged to win a V prize. After that, at the timing of ta10, the final display of the pattern on the operation port display unit 43 is started, and at the timing of ta11 when the game round is completed, the gaming state shifts from the first special gaming state to the special hit gaming state. Then, based on the fact that the V prize is generated at the timing of ta12, the special hit gaming state is shifted to the V jackpot gaming state at the timing of ta13.

Next, referring to the timing chart of FIG. 61, the game times in the first special game state correspond to the result of the deviation, and the hold related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit until the result of the success / failure notification. A supplementary explanation will be given regarding the flow of the game.

At the timing of tb1, the first variable winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and shifts from the round game to the ending. In the ending, the player is notified of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state this time in the result notification part. After that, the result notification ends at the timing of tb2, and the introduction effect of the challenge effect executed in the first special game state, which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state, is executed. At the timing of tb3 in this challenge production introduction part, right-handed notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the first special gaming state.

At the timing of tb4 that follows, the jackpot game state ends and the game shifts to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, and when the game ball wins a prize in the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 frequently changes from the closed state to the open state. It will be switched. The challenge effect is started with the transition to the first special gaming state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not memorized, so until the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs. The waiting part of the challenge production is executed. Right-handed notification (large) will continue even in this standby part.

At the timing of tb5 when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs after the transition to the first special gaming state, the challenge production shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as an opportunity. In addition, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small) triggered by the winning. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 is held at the timing of tb6 by continuing the firing of the game ball even after the right-handed notification (large) is completed at the timing of tb5. Has reached the upper limit (4 pieces).

At the timing of tb7 in which the challenge production is in progress, the player is notified of the result of winning or failing the game. That is, the result of success or failure is clearly shown on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the corresponding game times correspond to the out-of-game results, and it is clearly shown to the player that the out-of-game times are the out-of-game results at the timing of tb7. After the result of the loss is clearly shown to the player, the right-handed notification (small) is canceled.
After that, the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed on the display unit BS for the second operating port at the timing of tb8, and the state shifts to the third special gaming state at the timing of tb9 after the confirmation display is completed. In the third special gaming state, the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 is exhausted.

After that, the process shifts to the third special gaming state at the timing of tb9, and in the third special gaming state, the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 is exhausted.

Next, referring to the timing chart of FIG. 62, the game times in the first special game state correspond to the result of the deviation, and the hold related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit until the result of the success / failure notification. A supplementary explanation will be given regarding the flow of the game.

At the timing of tk1, the first variable winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and shifts from the round game to the ending. In the ending, the player is notified of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state this time in the result notification part. After that, the result notification ends at the timing of tk2, and the introduction effect of the challenge effect executed in the first special game state, which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state, is executed. At the timing of tk3 in this challenge production introduction part, right-handed notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the first special gaming state.

At the timing of the following tc4, the jackpot game state ends and the game shifts to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, and when the game ball wins a prize in the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 frequently changes from the closed state to the open state. It will be switched. The challenge effect is started with the transition to the first special gaming state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not memorized, so until the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs. The waiting part of the challenge production is executed. Right-handed notification (large) will continue even in this standby part.

At the timing of tc5 when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs after the transition to the first special gaming state, the challenge production shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as an opportunity. In addition, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small) triggered by the winning. In the example shown in FIG. 62, the launch of the game ball is stopped after the right-handed notification (large) is completed at the timing of tc5, and the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 is less than the upper limit (4). It has become.

At the timing of tk6 in which the challenge production is in progress, the player is notified of the result of winning or failing the game. That is, the result of success or failure is clearly shown on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the corresponding game times correspond to the out-of-game results, and it is clearly shown to the player that the out-of-game times are the out-of-game results.

At the timing of tc7 after the result notification, the right-handed notification (small) is switched to the right-handed notification (large). As a result, the player is prompted to launch the game ball toward the right route. At the timing of tk8, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit, and the right-handed notification (large) ends with this as an opportunity. After that, the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result is stopped and displayed on the display unit BS for the second operating port at the timing of tk9, and the state shifts to the third special gaming state at the timing of tk10 after the confirmation display is completed. In the third special gaming state, the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 is exhausted.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the configuration shown in the first embodiment, by shifting to the first special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second operating port 34, and the hold information is easily accumulated. Here, the value is different between the hold information that triggered the start of the game in the first special game state and the hold information that was acquired during the game and carried over to the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. To do. That is, a privilege (time saving) given to the player depending on whether the winning result → V prize is obtained in the game times in the third special game state or the winning result → V prize is obtained in the game times in the first special game state. There is a difference in the number of times). In other words, after the transition to the third special gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible to enter the second operating port 34, and the game is substantially limited to the reserved information stored during the first special gaming state. Will progress. Here, if the value of the hold information acquired by entering the starting ball after the transition to the first special game state is changed according to the change in the situation in which the game times related to the hold information are executed, it is assumed. , It is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

As shown in the present embodiment, if the end reference number of times of the special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is different, the result of hitting during the third special game state by the hold information acquired during the special game state. In the case of, the game shifts to the first special game state again, and the winning in the first special game state can be re-challenged. By enabling such a novel game progress, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, if the privilege (time reduction number of times) given to the player when a winning result is obtained in the game times in the first special game state is given preferential treatment, the tension in the game times can be increased. .. In addition, even if the winning result is not obtained in the game round, the player can re-challenge the acquisition of the privilege on the smaller side by the acquired special information, and the player cannot get the winning result in the game round. It is possible to preferably suppress a factor that rapidly reduces the motivation to play.

In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, in the game times (predetermined game times) in the first special game state, when the lottery result in the predetermined game times is a winning result, it corresponds to the subsequent pending information stored. The number of pending information corresponding to the result is specified, and the number of consecutive hits based on the specific result is suggested during the predetermined game. In other words, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, it is also suggested how many hit results are reserved, so that the player is given a feeling of satisfaction beyond the simple winning result. be able to. By making such a novel suggestion, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned predetermined game times, when the lottery result in the predetermined game times is a winning result, the game related to each stored hold information is referred to with reference to the stored subsequent hold information. It is estimated that the number of times the winning result will be obtained in a plurality of game times including the number of times and the game times related to the reserved information that has not been stored yet. Then, this estimation result will be notified at the predetermined game times. With such a configuration, when a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game number, it is also notified how many times the winning result is reserved, so that the satisfaction is more than simply the winning result. A feeling can be given to the player. Since a number exceeding the storage upper limit number of the reserved information may be notified, the impact when the notification is performed becomes extremely large. This is advantageous in increasing the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that the impact and appearance of the estimated result to be notified can be suitably improved by configuring the estimation result notified during the predetermined game time to include the hit result in the predetermined game time.

In executing the above-mentioned notification of the estimation result (suggestion of the number of consecutive hits), in order to estimate how the branching of the game state transition destination etc. proceeds if the number of stored pending information decreases. It means that the number of guessing factors is reduced, and there is a concern that the reliability of the notification may be lowered, or the impact of the notification may be weakened because the number of hit results to be notified is underestimated. In view of such circumstances, it is inconvenient to configure the configuration in which the estimation or the notification of the estimation result is avoided when the stored pending information does not reach the reference number (for example, the upper limit number of storage). It has the technical significance of being able to suppress the occurrence.

As described above, it is preferable to earn as many pending information as possible in order to strengthen the impact of the estimated result to be notified and to improve the reliability. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the configuration is such that the launch of the game ball toward the second operating port 34 is suggested before the estimation, the number of reserved information that can be referred to at the time of estimation can be obtained.

In addition, in the predetermined game times, by suggesting the number of consecutive hits using the "V" symbol used for notifying the hit result, a correlation is given between the notification of the hit result and the suggestion of the number of consecutive hits. You can build an integrated production.

When the predetermined game times (final game times) in the first special game state correspond to the missed result, the mode of the missed result effect differs depending on the number of stored information on hold. In this way, the degree of attention to the predetermined game times is changed by the configuration in which the production mode of the predetermined game times in the first special game state changes depending on the state of entering the second operating port 34 in the first special game state. Can contribute to the improvement of.

Regarding the first special game state, the support mode corresponds to the high frequency support mode, which facilitates entry into the second operating port 34. In such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid that the function of differentiating the effect mode depending on whether or not the upper limit of the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is reached is not exhibited well.

As shown in the present embodiment, when the production is composed of two parts, the first half and the second half, for the predetermined game times, the holding information in which the production mode of the production for the deviation result in the latter half after the notification of the result of the result is stored. By making the configuration different depending on the number of the above, it is possible to preferably suppress the effect from becoming monotonous even after the disengagement result is notified.

When shifting from the first special gaming state to the third special gaming state, the more pending information carried over from the first special gaming state to the third special gaming state, the more advantageous the player is. In such a configuration, after being notified that the result is out of order, the game can be advantageously advanced by increasing the number of reserved information to the upper limit by the end of the game round. Therefore, in the latter half of the above-mentioned production, a practically preferable configuration is obtained by suppressing the disadvantage of the player as a configuration including the display of an image suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the second operating port 34 to the player. realizable.

<Modification example 1>
In the first embodiment described above, when the game times executed in the first special game state correspond to the out-of-game result, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 at the time when the win / fail result is notified. It is determined whether or not the upper limit has been reached, and if it is insufficient, the right-handed notification (large) is executed, but the timing for confirming the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 and the right-handed notification The timing to start (Large) is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to confirm the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 at a predetermined timing after the notification of success or failure. Even in this case, it becomes difficult to newly acquire the hold related to the second operating port 34 after the end of the first special gaming state. Therefore, it is preferable to start the right-handed notification (large) before the end of the first special gaming state.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment described above, when shifting from the jackpot gaming state to the first special gaming state, the right-handed notification (large) is started during the ending in the jackpot gaming state, and the right-handed notification (large) is started. Is configured to be continued so as to straddle the jackpot game state and the first special game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to disclose the right-handed notification (large) at the time of transition to the first special gaming state or after the transition.

<Modification example 3>
In the first embodiment described above, an image for right-handed notification executed when the second variable winning device 32B of the right route should be aimed at for the purpose of V winning, and a second operation of the right route for the purpose of holding acquisition. The image is different from the image for right-handed notification that is executed when the mouth 34 should be aimed, but the right-handed notification that is executed when the second variable winning device 32B on the right route should be aimed for the purpose of V winning. It is also possible to make the image for right-handed notification, which is executed when the second operating port 34 of the right route should be aimed at for the purpose of holding acquisition, the same as the image for right-handed notification.

<Modification example 4>
In the first embodiment described above, the right-handed notification (large) executed at the beginning of the first special gaming state is released when at least one hold related to the second operating port 34 is acquired. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this. The right-handed notification (large) executed at the beginning of the first special gaming state may be canceled when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment described above, the right-handed notification (small) and the right-handed notification (large) are switched between the right-handed notification (small) execution period and the right-handed notification (large) execution period. It is also possible to have a configuration in which are duplicated. For example, it is preferable that the right-handed notification (large) is executed during the right-handed notification (small).

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment described above, the right-handed notification (small) is continued even in the main part of the challenge production, but the right-handed notification (small) is made as the challenge production shifts to the main part. It is also possible to have a configuration in which is terminated.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment described above, by setting the variable display mode in the third special gaming state to the first variable display mode, the third special gaming state = normal, although there are differences in the main game progress targets. Although it is in a game state, it is not limited to this. In order to enhance the peculiarity of the third special gaming state, the variable display mode in the third special gaming state is set to the third variable display mode different from the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode, and is referred to as the third special gaming state. It may be configured to completely differentiate from the normal gaming state.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, in the first special effect mode in the first special gaming state, the period from the start of the main part to the timing at which the winning / failing result is notified by the symbol display device 41 and the timing of the notification. When compared with the period from to the end of the game round, the latter is configured to be longer than the former, but it is not limited to this. When comparing the period from the start of the main part to the timing when the winning / fail result is notified by the symbol display device 41 and the period from the timing of the notification to the end of the game round, the former is better than the latter. It may be configured to be long, or both may be configured to have the same length.

Further, in the first special effect mode in the first special game state, the period from the start of the main part to the timing when the hit / fail result is notified by the symbol display device 41, and from the timing of the notification to the operation port display unit 43. When compared with the period until the pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in, the latter is configured to be longer than the former, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the start of the main part to the timing when the hit / fail result is notified by the symbol display device 41, and the period from the timing of the notification until the symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the operation port display unit 43. When comparing, the former may be configured to be longer than the latter, or both may be configured to have the same length.

<Modification example 9>
In the first embodiment described above, the upper limit of the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 is set to 4, but the upper limit may be arbitrarily changed.

<Modification example 10>
In the first embodiment described above, the upper limit of the number of consecutive hits by the limiter (4 times) and the upper limit of the number of holdings (4) related to the second operating port 34 are set to the same number, but these can be different. Is. However, in estimating the number of consecutive hits exceeding the upper limit of the number of holds, it is preferable to be able to specify the flow of limiter operation → hit within the following four holds. The upper limit of the number of consecutive hits by the limiter is preferably smaller than the upper limit of the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34. When making such a change, it is more preferable that the limiter does not operate a plurality of times within the following four holds.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment described above, in the first special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times related to the second operating port 34 is set to "1", but the end reference number of times is May be changed arbitrarily. For example, in the first special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the end reference number of game times related to the second operating port 34 may be set to "2" times, or may be set to "3" times or more.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, in the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the special hit result is obtained in the third special gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The configuration was set to give preferential treatment so that the number of end reference times set is larger when the result is a special hit result, but this has been changed to the first special game state and the second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. In the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the case where the special hit result is obtained may be preferentially set so that the number of termination criteria is set larger than the case where the special hit result is obtained. It is possible.

<Modification example 12>
In the first embodiment described above, when a special hit result is obtained during the high frequency support mode, the player is given preferential treatment so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the special hit result is obtained during the low frequency support mode. However, when a special hit result is obtained during the low frequency support mode, it is possible to give preferential treatment to the player as compared with the case where the special hit result is obtained during the high frequency support mode.

<Modification example 13>
In the first embodiment described above, there is a difference in the support mode set after that between the case where the special hit result is obtained during the high frequency support mode and the case where the special hit result is obtained during the low frequency support mode. The configuration is such that it occurs, but it is not limited to this. For example, the variable display mode for determining the variable display time in the operation port display unit includes a normal mode (first mode) and a time saving mode (second mode) in which the variable display time is shortened so as to be shorter than the normal mode. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which the support mode set after that is different between the case where the special hit result is obtained during the normal mode and the case where the special hit result is obtained during the time saving mode. ..

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment described above, the number of consecutive hits is calculated → suggested only when the number of games executed during the first special game state corresponds to the hit result. Alternatively, in addition, when the game times executed during the first special game state correspond to the outlier result, the number of consecutive hits can be calculated → suggested.

In the case of a configuration in which calculation → suggestion is performed when the result is out of alignment in this way, the above is limited to the case where the acquired subsequent hold can return from the third special gaming state to the second special gaming state. It is good to differentiate from calculation → suggestion when it is a winning result by performing calculation → suggestion.

In addition, it is possible to configure the suggestion start timing to be different between the case of the off result and the case of the hit result. In this case, it is advisable to make a difference so that the start timing of the suggestion in the case of the off-result is earlier than the start timing of the suggestion in the case of the hit result.

In addition, it is possible to configure the suggestion execution period to be different between the case of the out-of-order result and the case of the hit result. In this case, it is advisable to make a difference so that the execution period of the suggestion in the case of the wrong result is longer than the execution period of the suggestion in the case of the hit result.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment described above, during the first special game state, the number of consecutive hits is suggested after the notification of the special hit result, but it is also possible to perform the notification and the suggestion at the same time. is there.

<Modification 16>
In the first embodiment described above, in the first special game state, the display effect for suggesting the number of consecutive hits is executed by using the "V" symbol used at the time of notifying the special hit result. , The display effect for suggesting the number of consecutive hits may be arbitrarily changed as long as the number of consecutive hits can be suggested.

<Modification example 17>
As an execution condition for suggesting the number of consecutive hits in the first special gaming state, it may be added that the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached a predetermined number. This predetermined number may be the upper limit of the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34, or may be a number smaller than the upper limit.

In the case of such a configuration, if the number of holdings has not reached the predetermined number, the number of consecutive hits may not be calculated, or if the number of holdings has not reached the predetermined number. May be configured such that the number of consecutive hits is calculated but the number of consecutive hits is not suggested.

<Modification 18>
The suggested content of the number of consecutive hits started in the first special game state may be configured to be updated as the game progresses. For example, if the number of consecutive hits is suggested and the player returns to the first special gaming state through another gaming state, the suggested content is updated based on the number of consecutive hits calculated in the first special gaming state. It is good to do.

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment described above, when estimating the number of consecutive hits during the first special gaming state, the winning / failing result and the transitioning gaming state are sequentially specified for each hold, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. Although the amount of stored data is large, the relationship between the acquired hold status and the number of consecutive times is mapped and stored in advance, and the number of consecutive hits is estimated by collating the relationship with the actual hold status. It is also possible to.

<Modification example 20>
In the first embodiment described above, the hold information referred to when calculating the number of consecutive hits during the first special gaming state is limited to the hold information related to the second operating port 34, but this is changed to the first. It is also possible that the hold information referred to when calculating the number of consecutive hits during the special game state is the hold information related to the second operating port 34 and the holding information related to the first operating port 33.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the player shifts to the first special gaming state, a notification (right-handed notification (large)) for prompting a prize to the second operating port 34 is sent at the beginning of the first special gaming state. After notifying the execution and the winning / failing result in the game round, the number of consecutive hits is calculated (estimated) based on the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34. In the present embodiment, the basic flow of the game is the same as that in the first embodiment, but the configuration related to the right-handed notification, specifically, the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 is executed. A part of the challenge effect progress process (process for winning result) is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the hit result processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

<Processing for winning results>
In the hit result processing, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the introduction effect of the second special effect mode is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the process proceeds to step S2902. In step S2902, it is determined whether or not the winning number suggestion effect is being produced. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not the right-handed notification (middle) is being executed.

Here, the right-handed notification (middle) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 64 (b), for the right-handed notification (middle), the occupied area of the image for right-handed notification on the display screen G is larger than that of the right-handed notification (small) (see FIG. 64 (a)). Moreover, it is smaller than the right-handed notification (large). In the right-handed notification (middle), an arrow that bypasses the combination of "V" symbols displayed in the center of the display screen G from the upper side to the right side, the character "CHARGE", and information indicating the acquisition status of the hold are provided. It consists of an indicator showing the remaining time. That is, the display is configured to be as large as possible without interfering with the display of the winning result. It should be noted that the sound output from the speaker unit 64 in the right-handed notification (middle) is the right-handed notification (large), and more specifically, the right-handed notification (large) is executed when the situation should be aimed at the second operating port 34. ), And the volume is set to be the same as the right-handed notification (large).

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the right-handed notification (middle). Specifically, after the winning / failing result is notified in the first half part, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed. This predetermined period is a period for explaining to the player that the suggestion effect of the number of consecutive hits (suggestion effect of the number of winnings) occurs.

If a negative determination is made in step S2904, the final result processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the process proceeds to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S2905, the process proceeds to step S2906, right-handed notification (middle) start processing is executed, and then the final hit result processing ends. In the start process of step S2906, the execution period of the right-handed notification (middle), in other words, the grace period until the calculation of the number of consecutive hits is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the grace period is secured so that the calculation timing of the number of consecutive hits is not the timing of the success / failure notification but the timing after the timing of the success / failure notification. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, the process for starting the winning number suggestion effect is executed in step S2907, and then the processing for the final result is ended.

Returning to the description of step S2903, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, that is, if the right-handed notification (middle) is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2908. In step S2908, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2908, the right-handed notification (middle) end process is executed in step S2909, the winning number suggestion effect start process is executed in the following step S2907, and then the winning result is used. End the process.

Returning to the description of step S2908, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, that is, if the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, it is determined whether or not the set period of the right-handed notification (middle) has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2910, the final result processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, each process of steps S2909 and S2907 is executed, and then the final result process is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S2902, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, that is, if the winning number suggestion effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S2911. In step S2911, it is determined whether or not it is the introduction effect start timing of the second special effect mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2911, the processing for the final result is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2911, the process proceeds to step S2912, the introduction effect start process of the second special effect mode is executed, and then the final result processing is ended.

Returning to the description of step S2901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, that is, if the introduction effect of the second special effect mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2913. In step S2913, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the right-handed notification (large). If a negative determination is made in step S2913, the final result processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2913, the right-handed notification (large) start process is executed in step S2914, and then the final hit result process ends.

<Flow of the game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the flow of the game will be supplementarily described. FIG. 65 shows the case where the number of games held in the first special game state corresponds to the hit result and the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit by the start timing of the right-handed notification (middle). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

At the timing of td1, the first variable winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and shifts from the round game to the ending. In the ending, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state this time is notified (clarified) to the player in the result notification part. After that, the notification ends at the timing of td2, and the introduction effect for the challenge effect executed in the first special game state, which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state, is started. At the timing of td3 during this introduction effect (challenge effect introduction part), the right-handed notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the first special gaming state.

At the timing of the following td4, the jackpot game state ends and the game shifts to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, and when the game ball wins a prize in the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 frequently changes from the closed state to the open state. It will be switched. The challenge effect is started with the transition to the first special gaming state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not secured, so until the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs. The waiting part of the challenge production is executed. Right-handed notification (large) will continue even in this standby part.

At the timing of td5 when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs after the transition to the first special gaming state, the challenge production shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as an opportunity. In addition, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small) triggered by the winning. In the example shown in FIG. 65, the launch operation of the game ball is stopped before the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit (4 pieces), and the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 is The game is proceeding without reaching the upper limit.

At the timing of td6 in which the challenge production is in progress, the result of winning or failing the game is notified (clarified) to the player. That is, the result of success or failure is clearly shown on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43. At the timing of td7, which has passed a predetermined period from the timing of td6, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 is less than the upper limit, and right-handed notification (middle) is started at this timing. At the timing of td8 after that, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. With this as an opportunity, the right-handed notification (middle) is canceled, and the suggestion effect of the number of consecutive hits is started.

It should be noted that the timing at which the number of holdings reaches the upper limit due to the winning of the second operating port 34 depends on the operation of the player and the like, and some variation may occur. Therefore, if the interval period until the right-handed notification (large) executed after that is shorter than the reference period, the right-handed notification (medium) is switched to the right-handed notification (small), while the interval period is shorter than the reference period. If it is long, it is configured to switch from right-handed notification (middle) to no right-handed notification. This suppresses the situation where the player suffers a disadvantage due to the fact that the firing operation is not performed, and avoids that excessively fine switching of the operation suggestion causes discomfort to the player. It is a device to do.

At the timing of td9 when the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit, the number of consecutive hits is suggested. After that, at the timing of t, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to, and at the timing of td11, the pattern corresponding to the hit result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the operation port display unit 43. At the timing of td12 when the fixed display period has elapsed, the challenge effect ends and the gaming state shifts from the first special gaming state to the special hit gaming state. Then, based on the fact that the V prize is generated at the timing of td13, the special hit gaming state is shifted to the V jackpot gaming state at the timing of td14.

<Modification example 1>
In the second embodiment described above, the right-handed notification (large) is terminated based on the acquisition of one hold related to the second operating port 34 after the transition to the first special gaming state. It is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the right-handed notification (large) can be terminated before the number of acquired holds reaches the upper limit. For example, there are two holds related to the second operating port 34 after the transition to the first special gaming state. The right-handed notification (large) is terminated based on the acquisition, or the right-handed notification is based on the acquisition of three holds related to the second operating port 34 after the transition to the first special gaming state. The configuration is such that (Large) is terminated, or the right-handed notification (Large) is terminated based on the acquisition of four holds related to the second operating port 34 after the transition to the first special gaming state. It is also possible.

Further, it is also possible to terminate the right-handed notification (large) after a predetermined period after one hold related to the second operating port 34 is acquired after the transition to the first special gaming state.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment described above, in the game round executed after the transition to the first special gaming state, the right-handed notification (large) is executed as the right-handed notification in the first half part, and the right-handed notification is executed as the right-handed notification in the second half part. The configuration is such that right-handed notification (middle) is executed. That is, the right-handed notification in the first half part is emphasized more prominently than the right-handed notification in the second half part, but the present invention is not limited to this.

The right-handed notification in the first half part and the right-handed notification in the second half part may be shared, or the right-handed notification in the second half part may be emphasized more prominently than the right-handed notification in the first half part.

<Modification example 3>
If at least one hold information related to the second operating port 34 is stored before the transition to the first special gaming state, the first right-handed hit executed from the jackpot gaming state to the first special gaming state. It is also possible to configure the system in which the notification (large) is not executed (cancelled).

<Modification example 4>
In the second embodiment described above, after the start of the right-handed notification (large) at the beginning of the main part, the right-handed notification (large) is terminated when a prize is generated in the second operating port 34. However, at this time, a message (for example, "completion") indicating that a prize has been won in the second operating port 34 may be displayed.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment described above, right-handed notification (small) is executed between the right-handed notification (large) in the first half (beginning) of the main part and the right-handed notification (middle) in the second half of the main part. Although it is configured, it is also possible to configure it so that the right-handed notification (small) is not performed.

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment described above, right-handed notification (small) is executed between the right-handed notification (large) in the first half (beginning) of the main part and the right-handed notification (middle) in the second half of the main part. However, during the period when this right-handed notification (small) is being executed, the effect being executed is the effect when the game ball launched to the right route enters the entry part such as the through gate 35. It is also possible to make a configuration that changes (for example, step up) based on the ball entering.

<Modification 7>
In the second embodiment described above, a fixed interval (predetermined period) is provided from the notification of the number of winnings in the main part to the start of the right-handed notification, but this interval is omitted. It is also possible.

<Modification 8>
In the second embodiment described above, even if the execution period of the right-handed notification (middle) elapses without the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 reaching the upper limit, continuous hits from the acquired hold. The configuration is such that the number of times is calculated, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the number of holds has not reached the upper limit at the timing when the execution period of the right-handed notification (middle) has elapsed, it is possible to configure the configuration so that the number of consecutive hits is not calculated. Even in this case, it is preferable that the winning number notification effect is executed so as to keep the display of "V × 3".

<Modification example 9>
In the second embodiment described above, the right-handed notification (middle) is executed in the second right-handed notification in the main part, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute the right-handed notification (large) instead of the right-handed notification (middle).

<Third embodiment>
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of consecutive hits is suggested during the game times executed in the first special game state. In the present embodiment, the configuration regarding the suggestion of the number of consecutive hits is different from each of the above-described embodiments. Specifically, the suggestion of the number of consecutive hits is executed during the V jackpot game state in which the first special game state shifts through the special hit game state or in the jackpot game state in which the first special game state directly shifts. , A part of the first special effect mode processing (challenge effect progress process and challenge effect end process) executed by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 has been changed. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 66 and 67, focusing on the differences from the respective processes in the first embodiment.

<Challenge production progress processing>
In the challenge effect progress process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the symbol display device 41 is informing the result of the result, that is, whether or not the combination of "V" symbols is stopped and displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3002. In step S3002, the symbol display device 41 determines whether or not it is time to notify the result of success or failure. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the present challenge production progress process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process proceeds to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the game times correspond to the winning result. If it corresponds to the hit result, an affirmative determination is made in step S3003, the process proceeds to step S3004, the hit result corresponding effect start process is executed, and then the challenge effect progress process ends. In the hit result corresponding effect, an image indicating that the fairy has been captured is displayed on the display screen G, and the combination of the "V" symbols is stopped and displayed to clearly indicate to the player that the challenge effect has been successful.

On the other hand, when it corresponds to the deviation result, a negative determination is made in step S3003, the process proceeds to step S3005, the deviation result corresponding effect start process is executed, and then the challenge effect progress process ends. In the off-result response effect, an image indicating that the fairy has been missed is displayed on the display screen G, and the "sorry" symbol is stopped and displayed to clearly indicate to the player that the challenge effect has failed.

Returning to the description of step S3001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, the process proceeds to step S3006. In step S3006, it is determined whether or not it is the notification completion timing of the winning / failing result. If a negative determination is made in step S3006, the present challenge production progress process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S3007, the present challenge production progress process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3007, the right-handed notification (medium) or right-handed notification (large) start process is executed in step S3008 to end the challenge effect progress process.

Next, the challenge effect end process will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

<Challenge production end processing>
In the challenge effect end process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round related to the challenge effect. Specifically, the operation port display unit 43 determines whether or not it is the timing when the final display of the pattern is started. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the present challenge production end process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3102. In step S3102, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the winning result. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the present challenge production end process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, it is determined whether or not the subsequent hold related to the second operating port 34 is secured. If a negative determination is made in step S3103, the present challenge production end process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, the number of times per continuous calculation process is executed. Since this process is the same as the continuous per-per number calculation process (see FIG. 50) shown in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted, but the calculation result is stored and held by the RAM 244. After that, in step S3105, the winning number suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, and the present challenge effect end process is completed.

Next, the jackpot game state process executed as part of the periodic process by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68.

<Processing for jackpot game status>
In the jackpot game state process, first, it is determined in step S3201 whether or not the jackpot game state effect is being executed. The effect for the jackpot game state is a moving image displayed during the jackpot gaming state, and in addition to the moving image, the number of rounds being executed, the number of prize balls won, and the like are displayed on the display screen G. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the process proceeds to step S3202. In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the opening command for the jackpot has been received from the main control device 81. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the processing for the main jackpot game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the process for starting the big hit game state effect is executed in step S3202, and then the process for the main big hit game state is ended.

Returning to the description of step S3201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, that is, if the jackpot gaming state effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3240. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not the winning number suggestion effect is being executed by interrupting a series of basic effects. If a negative determination is made in step S3204, the process proceeds to step S3205. In step S3205, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the winning number suggestion effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3205, the processing for the main jackpot game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3205, the process proceeds to step S3206. In step S3206, it is determined whether or not the winning number suggestion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the processing for the main jackpot game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, the process for starting the winning number suggestion effect is executed in step S3207, and then the process for the big hit game state ends. Since the winning number suggestion effect is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 58 and the like), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Returning to the description of step S3204, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the process proceeds to step S3208. In step S3208, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the winning number suggestion effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3208, the processing for the main jackpot game state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3208, the process proceeds to step S3209. In step S3209, the winning number suggestion effect end process is executed. As a result, the effect for the jackpot game state returns from the winning number suggestion effect to the above basic effect. However, even in this case, the suggestion content will continue to be displayed on the display screen G. After that, the process proceeds to step S3210, the winning number suggestion flag stored in the RAM 244 is erased, and the processing for the main jackpot game state is completed.

<Flow of the game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the flow of suggesting the number of winnings in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 shows a case where the number of games held in the first special game state corresponds to the hit result and the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit by the start timing of the right-handed notification (large). It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

At the timing of te1, the first variable winning device 32A is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the round game is shifted to the ending. In the ending, the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state this time is notified (clarified) to the player in the result notification part. After that, the notification ends at the timing of te2, and the introduction effect for the challenge effect executed in the first special game state, which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state, is started. At the timing of te3 during this introduction effect (challenge effect introduction part), the right-handed notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the first special gaming state.

At the timing of the following te4, the jackpot game state ends and the game shifts to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode, and when the game ball wins a prize in the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 frequently changes from the closed state to the open state. It will be switched. The challenge effect is started with the transition to the first special gaming state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not secured, so until the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs. The waiting part of the challenge production is executed. Right-handed notification (large) will continue even in this standby part.

At the timing of te5 when the winning of the second operating port 34 occurs after the transition to the first special gaming state, the challenge production shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as an opportunity. In addition, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small) triggered by the winning. In the example shown in FIG. 69, the launch operation of the game ball is stopped before the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit (4 pieces), and the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 is The game is proceeding without reaching the upper limit.

At the timing of te6 in which the challenge production is in progress, the result of winning or failing the game is notified (clarified) to the player. That is, the result of success or failure is clearly shown on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43. At the timing of te7, which has passed a predetermined period from the timing of te6, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 is less than the upper limit, and right-handed notification (middle) is started at this timing. At the timing of te8 after that, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. Here, in the present embodiment, the right-handed notification (middle) is continued even after the number of reservations reaches the upper limit. Specifically, it shifts to the special hit game state and continues until a V prize is generated. With such a configuration, the mode of right-handed notification is finely switched, which suppresses giving the player the impression that it is bothersome.

After that, the final display of the pattern on the operation port display unit 43 is started at the timing of te10, and the number of consecutive hits is calculated based on the hold related to the second operation port 34 stored at this timing. After that, at the timing of te11 when the game round ends, the state shifts from the first special game state to the special hit game state. When the second variable winning device 32B is opened and V winning is generated, the game shifts to the V big hit gaming state after the end of the special hit gaming state. At the timing of te14 when the second round starts in the V jackpot game state, the winning number suggestion effect is started, and at the timing of te15 thereafter, the number of consecutive hits is suggested to the player.

<Modification example 1>
In the third embodiment, the number of consecutive hits is calculated when the pattern is stopped and displayed (confirmed) on the operating port display unit 43. That is, the number of consecutive hits is calculated before the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode. It is also possible to change this and calculate the number of consecutive hits after switching to the low frequency support mode. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the number of consecutive hits is calculated during the special hit game state, or a configuration in which the number of consecutive hits is calculated during the big hit game state.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the number of consecutive hits is calculated in the game times executed during the first special game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. <Modification example 4>
In the third embodiment, when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit in the latter half of the game times executed in the first special game state, right-handed notification (middle) or The configuration is such that (Large) is executed, but the configuration is not limited to this. After being notified that a hit result has been obtained, it is common to shift to the hit game state, so even if right-handed notification (medium) or (large) is performed regardless of the number of holdings, the hit game state There is little discomfort because the player can recognize that it is a right-handed notification. Further, since the high-frequency support mode is set until the game round is completed, the profit of the player is not significantly impaired even if the player strikes right.

<Modification example 3>
In the third embodiment, the number of consecutive hits is suggested during the V jackpot game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the number of consecutive hits is suggested during the special hit game state. It is also possible to have a configuration that suggests the number of consecutive hits at the timing of transition from the V jackpot gaming state to the second special gaming state, that is, at the start of the game round.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment or the like, the second operating port 34 is given preferential treatment to the player as compared with the first operating port 33. In such a configuration, although the hold related to the second operating port 34 can be obtained, the second special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is terminated without obtaining the hold. The advantage in the progress of the game can change significantly. In particular, in the first embodiment described above, a limiter is used to forcibly cut off the continuation of the high-frequency support mode, and at such a break, the game progress greatly depends on the presence or absence of hold. Will be done. This is a factor that impairs fairness between a player who has a deep understanding of the game machine and a player who has a poor understanding of the game machine, and is expected to hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Specifically, the right-handed notification processing corresponding to the second special effect mode, which is executed as a part of the periodic processing by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82, is characteristic. Hereinafter, the right-handed notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70. In the following description, the differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

<Right-handed notification processing for the second special production mode>
In the right-handed notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the right-handed notification is being emphasized.

In the present embodiment, as the right-handed notification in the second special effect mode, the basic right-handed notification LV0, the right-handed notification LV1 emphasized by the right-handed notification LV0, and the right-handed notification LV1 emphasized further than the right-handed notification LV1. The right-handed notification LV2 is provided (see FIG. 71). In the right-handed notification LV0, a small ">> right-handed >>" is displayed in the corner of the display screen G (the area that does not overlap with the variation display end area of the symbol). However, the output of the sound effect for right-handed notification by the speaker unit 64 is stopped, and the LED attached to the electric accessory 34a is also turned off. On the other hand, in the right-handed notification LV1, an effect is added to the characters ">> right-handed >>" displayed in the above corner of the display screen G, and the effect for right-handed notification is added from the speaker unit 64. Sound is output, and the LED attached to the electric accessory 34a lights up. Then, in the right-handed notification LV2, the characters ">> right-handed >>" are enlarged and displayed so as to overlap a part of the variable display area of the symbol on the display screen G, and the speaker unit 64 for right-handed notification. A sound effect is output, and the LED attached to the electric accessory 34a lights up. The loudness of the sound effect and the amount of light of the LED in the right-handed notification LV2 are larger than those of the right-handed notification LV1.

If the right-handed notification is not the right-handed notification LV1 or the right-handed notification LV2, a negative determination is made in step S3301 and the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether or not a predetermined grace period has elapsed since the variable display of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43, that is, the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is started. If a negative determination is made in step S3302, the right-handed notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the winning result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3303, the process proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, the limiter is activated by this hit, and it is determined whether or not it is possible to shift to the third special gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305.

In step S3305, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the right-handed notification process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3305, the process proceeds to step S3306. After executing the right-handed notification first emphasis process in step S3306, the right-handed notification process ends. In the right-handed notification first emphasis process, the right-handed notification is switched from the right-handed notification LV0 to the right-handed notification LV1.

Returning to the description of step S3304, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, that is, if the limiter is scheduled to operate, the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3307, the right-handed notification process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3307, the right-handed notification second emphasis process is executed in step S3308, and then the right-handed notification process ends. In the right-handed notification second emphasis process, the right-handed notification is switched from the right-handed notification LV0 to the right-handed notification LV2.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3303, that is, if the game times this time correspond to the winning result, the process proceeds to step S3309. In step S3309, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3309, that is, if the result is a disengagement and the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit, the right-handed notification process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3309, that is, if the result is off and the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S3310. In step S3310, the emphasis enable / disable determination process is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not to emphasize the right-handed notification by referring to the fake emphasis determination table stored in the ROM 243. If it is determined not to be emphasized in the determination process of step S3310, a negative determination is made in step S3311, and the right-handed notification process is terminated as it is. If it is decided in step S3310 to emphasize, the process proceeds to either step S3311 or step S3308 to execute the right-handed notification emphasizing process, and then the right-handed notification process ends. The transition destination from step S3311, that is, the emphasis level is determined in step S3310.

Returning to the description of step S3301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, that is, if the right-handed notification is being emphasized, the process proceeds to step S3312. In step S3312, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, the emphasis release process is executed in step S3313, and then the right-handed notification process is terminated. By executing the emphasis release process, the right-handed notification LV0 is restored.

If a negative determination is made in step S3312, it is determined in step S3314 whether or not it is the timing when the second special effect mode ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3314, the right-handed notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3314, the emphasis release process is executed in step S3313, and then the right-handed notification process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72, the flow of emphasizing the right-handed notification in the second special effect mode (second special gaming state) will be illustrated. FIG. 72 shows one of the flow of the game when the special hit result is obtained during the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode and the game shifts to the special hit game state, and the limiter operates to shift to the first special game state. It is a timing chart which shows a part.

<Flow of emphasis on right-handed notification>
At the timing of tf1, the jackpot game state is shifted to the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode. At the timing of tf1, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 decreases from "3" to "2", and the variation display of the symbol on the display unit BS for the second operating port and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are displayed. It has been started. Further, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, and the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the through gate 35. The game times started at the timing of tf1 correspond to the special hit result, and at the timing of tf2 after a predetermined grace period has passed from the timing of tf1, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is still the upper limit. Not reached. And the limiter will be activated by this special hit result. For the above reasons, the right-handed notification is switched from the right-handed notification LV0 to the right-handed notification LV2.

After that, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 at the timing of tf3, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 increases from "2" to "3". Then, a prize is generated in the second operating port 3 at the timing of tf4, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 increases from "3" to "4". When the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit, the right-handed notification is switched from the right-handed notification LV2 to the right-handed notification LV0.

At the timing of tf5, the variation display of the symbol on the display unit BS for the second operating port and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are completed, and the game result is clearly shown to the player. After that, at the timing of tf6, the second special gaming state is shifted to the special hit gaming state. Since the V prize is generated at the timing of tf7, the special hit game state is shifted to the V jackpot game state at the timing of tf8. After the end of the V jackpot game state, the limiter shifts to the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, and the game proceeds by holding the remaining second operating port 34.

Even if the high-frequency support mode is set, the hold related to the second operating port 34 cannot be obtained unless the procedure of winning the through gate 35 → support lottery → winning the second operating port 34 is followed. A certain period of time is required. By setting a predetermined grace period, it is possible to prevent the function from becoming an annoying factor for the player due to frequent emphasis.

In the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode with the transition from the second special gaming state to the third special gaming state, and the second operating port 34 is reached. It is virtually impossible to enter the ball. In such a configuration, the more the reserved information acquired and stored during the second special gaming state and the more reserved information carried over from the second special gaming state to the third special gaming state, the more advantageous the player. In the second special gaming state, since the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the movement for the game rotation, the production performed during the game rotation, and the like, and the second operating port 34 is directed to the second operating port 34. I think that attention will decrease. Here, in the third special game state, if a hit result is obtained, the player can shift to the first special game state, so that the player's attention remains toward the production and the acquisition of the hold information is neglected. There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you should have originally obtained. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, in the game times that result in winning in the second special game state, if the number of stored information on hold has not reached the upper limit, the player strikes right. Notification is emphasized. In this way, by urging the player to acquire the hold information, the number of hold information related to the second operating port 34 becomes insufficient at the time of transition to the third special gaming state, and the player becomes disadvantageous. It suppresses that. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

In a configuration that controls the number of consecutive hits (so-called limiter), the number of games in the second special game state is forcibly shifted to the third game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode when the end reference number (specified number of times) is reached. , The player's willingness to play may decrease. At this time, as described above, if the player cannot enjoy the benefits that the player should originally obtain due to the lack of reserved information, there is a concern that the player's willingness to play will be significantly reduced. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned inconvenience occurs by emphasizing the suggestion of launching the game ball toward the second operating port 34, at least in a situation where the limiter can operate. Can be suitably suppressed.

Since the third special game state is a game state that can be expected from the consecutive villas, the player's attention is likely to be directed toward the production. Here, it is feared that the above-mentioned launch suggestion is overemphasized, which increases the possibility of giving the player the impression that the suggestion is troublesome. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the launch suggestion is emphasized by the right-handed notification (LV1) when the limiter is not activated and the right-handed notification (LV2) when the limiter is activated, the emphasis function is negative. The impression can be dispelled favorably.

At the start of the game round, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port is reduced. That is, the number of stored information on hold is always less than the upper limit. It is feared that emphasizing the suggestion each time will cause the suggestion to be emphasized frequently, and will likely give the player the impression that it is bothersome. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by providing a grace period during which emphasis cannot be made after the start of the game.

In the above-described configuration, if the emphasis is limited to the hit result, there is a concern that the effect of other effects executed during the game will be reduced. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the suggestion can be emphasized in a part of the case where the number of reserved information is insufficient even in the game times that result in the loss, the case where the result is a hit even if the emphasis occurs and the result of the loss Both cases occur. And, even if such fake emphasis is performed, the player does not suffer any disadvantage.

<Modification example 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the degree of emphasis (level) of the right-handed notification is different depending on whether the limiter is activated or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure (unify) the degree of emphasis of the right-handed notification depending on whether the limiter operates or does not operate.

<Modification 2>
The predetermined grace period shown in the fourth embodiment may be changed according to the remaining number of holdable items (the number of hold items related to the second operating port 34). For example, a difference may be provided so that the smaller the number of pending acquisitions, the longer the predetermined grace period.

Further, in the configuration in which the game result is clearly indicated through the reach display, it is possible to set the length of the predetermined grace period so that the predetermined grace period elapses after the transition to the reach display.

<Modification example 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the right-handed notification in the second special gaming state corresponding to the second special effect mode is devised, but the present invention is not limited to this. The same device may be applied to the right-handed notification in the second special gaming state corresponding to the continuous effect mode.

<Modification example 4>
In the fourth embodiment, when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit in a situation where the right-handed notification is emphasized, the emphasis on the right-handed notification is canceled and the right-handed notification is emphasized. The configuration is such that the notification is returned to LV0, but the right-handed notification itself is terminated when the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit in a situation where the right-handed notification is emphasized. Is also possible. Further, it is also possible to continue emphasizing the right-handed notification even when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit under the situation where the right-handed notification is emphasized.

<Modification 5>
In the second special effect mode, the symbol corresponding to the game result is displayed after the symbol display device 41 repeats the variable display → stop display (hereinafter referred to as unit effect or unit display) of each symbol string a plurality of times during one game. It is also possible to perform a special variation display in which the combination is stopped and displayed (see, for example, FIG. 73). In particular, if such a special variation is performed in the game times corresponding to the winning result, the player is made aware that the hold has been digested, although the hold has not actually been digested, and the right route. It is possible to encourage the launch of a game ball toward. Regarding the emphasis on the right-handed notification described above, it is preferable that the unit effect is executed at the timing after the unit effect is executed at least once at the beginning of the game.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment and the like, the second operating port 34 is given preferential treatment to the player as compared with the first operating port 33. In such a configuration, although the hold related to the second operating port 34 can be obtained, the second special gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is terminated without obtaining the hold. The advantage in the progress of the game can change significantly. In particular, in the first embodiment described above, a limiter is used to forcibly cut off the continuation of the high-frequency support mode, and at such a break, the game progress greatly depends on the presence or absence of hold. Will be done. This is a factor that impairs fairness between a player who has a deep understanding of the game machine and a player who has a poor understanding of the game machine, and is expected to hinder the improvement of the degree of attention to the game. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the variation display mode of the symbol in the second special effect mode in the second special effect mode in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 73, and then the notification / effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. The advance notification processing corresponding to the second special effect mode, which is executed as a part of the periodic processing by the MPU 242 of the above, will be described. In the following description, the differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

<Variable display mode>
As shown in FIG. 73A, when the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is the first variation display mode, the timing at which the variation display of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43 is started. At the same timing as the symbol display device 41, the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display of the symbol, and at the same timing as the timing at which the symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the operation port display unit 43 The symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed (confirmed). That is, the configuration is such that the change display of the symbol → the stop display is executed once during one game.

On the other hand, in the second special effect mode, the symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 41 becomes the second variation display mode. In this second variation display mode, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), during one game round, the symbol display device 41 displays variation display of each symbol sequence → stop display (hereinafter, referred to as unit effect or unit display). After repeating the above multiple times, a special variation display is executed in which the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, although the hold is not actually digested, it is possible to make the player aware that the hold has been digested and prompt the player to launch the game ball toward the right route.

In the present embodiment, in a situation where the above-mentioned unit effect is repeated, that is, when the winning result is notified to the player at the last unit effect during the game rotation, and when the unit effect other than the last unit effect is notified. In some cases, the result may be notified to the player. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the winning result may be notified in advance (advance notification) without waiting for the final unit production. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74, the advance notification processing corresponding to the second special effect mode, which is executed as a part of the periodic processing by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82, will be described.

<Preliminary notification processing for the second special production mode>
In the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode, first, it is determined in step S3401 whether or not the advance notification is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402. In step S3402, it is determined whether or not the advance notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, the process proceeds to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the winning result. If a negative determination is made in step S3403, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, in step S3404, it is determined whether or not the limiter is scheduled to operate in the current hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3404, the process proceeds to step S3405.

In step S3405, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S3405, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the process proceeds to step S3406. In step S3406, it is determined whether or not it is the completion timing of the unit effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3406, the process proceeds to step S3407 to determine whether or not the final unit production is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S3407, the process proceeds to step S3408, the advance notification flags are set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, and then the advance notification processing corresponding to the second special effect mode is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S3402, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, that is, if the advance notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process proceeds to step S3409. In step S3409, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to complete the unit effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3409, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3409, the advance notification start process is executed in step S3401, and then the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is terminated.

In the advance notification start processing, the speaker unit 64 outputs a sound effect corresponding to the advance notification, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is switched to the light emitting mode corresponding to the advance notification. Then, the advance notification command is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so as to display a message image (for example, “preparing to release V”) corresponding to the advance notification based on the reception of this advance notification command.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3406, that is, when the unit effect completion timing is reached, the advance notification start process is executed in step S3410, and then the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is performed. finish. That is, when the condition of advance notification is satisfied during the unit production, a branch occurs depending on whether the advance notification is started immediately or the advance notification is started after waiting for the next unit production. It becomes. This is a device for making it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the game times have been lost because the unit effect in the special variation display effect is interrupted halfway.

Here, an outline of the advance notification interrupt will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic view showing a special variation display in a game time in which advance notification does not occur, and FIG. 75 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a special variation display in a game time in which advance notification occurs.

In FIG. 75A, the game round corresponding to the hit result is started, and after the unit effect is repeated a plurality of times, the symbol combination corresponding to the hit result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the effective line on the display screen G. ) Has been done. In this example, the game progresses without the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 reaching the upper limit during the game round, and the number of holds is less than the upper limit even when the final unit effect is executed. Therefore, the condition of advance notification is not satisfied, and the hit result is notified without going through advance notification. In each unit effect executed before the final unit effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped).

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 75 (b), a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 after the game round, which is a hit result and is not scheduled to operate the limiter, is started, and the second operating port 34 is concerned. The number of pending items has reached the upper limit. In this case, a message image corresponding to the advance notification is displayed in the center of the display screen G so as to interrupt the unit effect immediately after. That is, one unit effect is replaced with the display of the message image. After that, the message image is displayed above and below the variable display area of the symbol in a reduced state, and the unit effect is executed under the situation where the message image is displayed. By performing the advance notification in this way, it is possible to urge the player not to perform the firing operation of the game ball.

Returning to the description of the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode of FIG. 74, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, that is, if the advance notification is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3411. In step S3411, it is determined whether or not the timing is before the completion of the final unit effect, specifically, the timing immediately before the symbol assembly corresponding to the hit result is stopped and displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S3411, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3411, the advance notification end processing is executed in step S34112, and then the advance notification processing corresponding to the second special effect mode is ended.

In the advance notification end processing, after blacking out the display screen G, the message image of "V release preparation" is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen G while maintaining the state, and the message image is hidden. To do. By hiding this message image, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is redisplayed in the stopped display (confirmed display) state.

Hereinafter, the flow of advance notification in the second special effect mode (second special game state) will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 shows a special hit (limiter non-operation) at the first game round in which the jackpot game state is changed to the second special game state, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 during the special hit game round is It is a timing chart exemplifying the case where the upper limit is reached.

<Flow of advance notification>
At the timing of tg1, the jackpot game state is shifted to the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode. At the timing of tg1, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 decreases from "3" to "2", and the variation display of the symbol on the display unit BS for the second operating port and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are displayed. It has been started. Further, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode, and the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the through gate 35. The game times started at the timing of tg1 correspond to the special hit result, and the right-handed notification is right-handed notification (small) → right-handed notification (large) at the timing of tg2 when the second unit production starts. ) Has been switched.

After that, a prize is generated in the second operating port 34 at the timing of tg3, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 increases from "2" to "3". Then, a prize is generated in the second operating port 3 at the timing of tg4, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is increasing from "3" to "4". When the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit, the right-handed notification is switched from right-handed notification (large) to right-handed notification (small). Further, at this timing, the above-mentioned condition of advance notification is satisfied, and the advance notification is on standby.

Advance notification is started at the timing of tg5 when the third unit production is started. As a result, a message image of "Preparing to release V" is displayed in the center of the display screen G instead of the symbol. At the timing of tg6 when the fourth unit effect (final unit display) is started, the message image of the advance notification is reduced and displayed on the upper and lower parts of the display screen G, and the symbol is redisplayed.

At the timing of tg7 after that, the display screen G is blacked out, the message image of the advance notification is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen G, and the design is hidden. Then, at the timing of tg8 immediately after that, that is, at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display unit BS for the second operating port, the advance notification is canceled and the symbol combination corresponding to the special hit result is an effective line. The symbol will be redisplayed while it is stopped on the display. As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the result is a hit.

At the timing of the following tg9, the second special gaming state is shifted to the special hit gaming state. Since the V prize is generated at the timing of tg10, the special hit game state is shifted to the V jackpot game state at the timing of tfg11.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, in the game times that result in winning during the third special game state, the number of reserved information reaches the upper limit during the variable display of the pattern for the game times. Advance notification will be given as a special suggestion to shift to the gaming state. By assigning a relationship between the number of reserved information and the advance notification in this way, it is possible to encourage the player who expects the advance notification to aim for reaching the upper limit. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

The advance notification is configured to continue at least until the game times (for example, variable display) in which the advance notification is started are completed. By making the configuration in which the advance notification is continued until the end of the corresponding game round in this way, it is possible to suitably suppress the oversight of the advance notification.

If a predetermined period has passed since the start of the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port, even if the number of reserved information reaches the upper limit during the game round that is the winning result in the third special game state, it is in advance. There is no configuration in which notification is not performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid, for example, the occurrence of advance notification immediately before the end of the game round. This is preferable in order to prevent the player from being confused by the mixture of the notification of the winning result and the advance notification.

<Modification example 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the hit result related to the non-operation of the limiter is set as one of the start conditions of the advance notification, but this condition can be omitted. In other words, during the second special effect mode, it is possible to configure the pre-notification execution condition to be satisfied when the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit in the game times corresponding to the hit result. is there. That is, regardless of whether or not the result is related to the limiter operation / non-operation, it is possible to provide advance notification when the number of holds related to the second operation port 34 reaches the upper limit. In this case, for example, when the limiter is not activated, the image of "V release preparing" is displayed as advance notification, while when the limiter is activated, the image of "ending preparation" is displayed as advance notification.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the advance notification is executed only in the game times corresponding to the winning result, but when the subsequent hold includes the one corresponding to the winning result, the preceding deviation occurs. It is also possible to start advance notification in the game times corresponding to the result, and to continue the advance notification over those game times. However, in such a configuration, it is preferable to add to the condition of advance notification that the hit result of the limiter operation schedule is not reserved in the game round immediately after the hit result is obtained. This is a device for suppressing the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 from becoming smaller than expected when shifting to the third special gaming state by the limiter operation.

<Modification example 3>
In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed notification is not executed during the advance notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the right-handed notification to be executed even during the advance notification. In such a configuration, it is preferable to execute the right-handed notification with the above-mentioned right-handed notification (small) in order to allow the advance notification and the right-handed notification to coexist on the display screen G.

<Modification example 4>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the winning result is clearly indicated in the final unit display, but when shifting from the second special gaming state to the special winning gaming state, the gaming state can be quickly switched. On the other hand, in order to ensure the certainty of the occurrence of the V prize, it is preferable to start the right-handed notification for the V prize at the game times during the second special game state. In consideration of such circumstances, the unit effect that stops and displays (confirmed display) the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is executed before the final unit effect, and the final unit effect is a right-handed notification for V prize. (For example, see FIG. 43 (b)) may be set as the execution period.

<Modification 5>
In the fifth embodiment, the variable display mode of the symbol in the second special effect mode is set to the second variable display mode, but the variable display mode of the symbol in the second special effect mode is also referred to as the first variable display mode. It is also possible to do. In this case, the advance notification may be started at the timing when the execution condition of the advance notification is satisfied.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the execution condition of the advance notification is satisfied during the unit effect, the start of the advance notification is delayed until the unit effect is completed, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not a thing. If the execution condition of the advance notification is satisfied during the unit production, the advance notification can be started at that timing.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the advance notification is executed in the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode, but the advance notification function is changed to the second special game state corresponding to the continuous effect mode. It is also possible to apply.

<Modification 7>
In the fifth embodiment, it is based on the fact that the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit in the game times corresponding to the hit result executed during the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode. When the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit in the game times corresponding to the hit result executed during the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode while the advance notification is executed. Is configured so that advance notification is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. While advance notification is executed based on the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 reaching the upper limit in the game times corresponding to the hit result executed during the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode, while the advance notification is executed. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game times corresponding to the hit result executed during the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit. Even if there is, it is possible to configure the system so that advance notification is executed. For example, if the subsequent hold does not include a hold corresponding to the result of the limiter operating, it is possible to execute the advance notification when the advance notification generation lottery is won.

<Modification 8>
In the fifth embodiment, the period during which the message image "V release is being prepared" is displayed in the center of the display screen G is set to the same length as the execution period of the unit effect, but the period is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the period during which the message image "Preparing to release V" is displayed in the center of the display screen G is set to be an integral multiple of the execution period of the unit effect, such as twice, three times, four times, and so on. Is also possible.

<Modification example 9>
In the fifth embodiment, the advance notification is not executed even if the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit during the final unit production, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit during the final unit production, the advance notification is executed if the execution period for the advance notification can be secured before the confirmation display. It is also possible to.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, even if the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit during the final unit production, the advance notification is not executed, but the holding related to the second operating port 34 is performed. It is sufficient if the configuration is such that when the number reaches the upper limit, whether or not the advance notification can be executed is determined based on the number of executions of the remaining unit production (remaining time of the game), for example, during the final unit production. Not only this, but in addition to this, even if the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit during the unit effect immediately before the final unit effect, the advance notification may not be executed.

It is also possible to configure the configuration in which the advance notification is not performed if a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game round when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit.

<Modification example 10>
When a ball enters a ball entry section such as a through gate 35 on the right route during advance notification, the effect (display) being executed by the symbol display device 41 changes based on the entry. It is also possible. For example, the message image of "Preparing to release V" may be enlarged each time a ball enters, or the arrangement of the symbols in the scroll display may change (for example, the number of "7" symbols increases). May be.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, when a lottery is performed by the main control device 81 based on the hold information related to the operating port, a pattern on the operating port display unit 43 is displayed at the same time as the lottery (specifically, immediately after the lottery). However, the configuration is such that the variation display of the symbol and the variation display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 are started, but the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the lottery, it is also possible to start the variable display of the symbol on the operation port display unit 43 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41.

Further, when the main control device 81 draws a lottery based on the hold information related to the through gate 35, at the same time as the lottery (specifically, immediately after the lottery), the pattern variation display and the symbol display device on the through gate display unit 44 The configuration is such that the variable display of the symbol in 41 is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the lottery, it is also possible to start the variable display of the symbol on the through-gate display unit 44 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, a difference in advantage is provided between the lottery related to the first operating port 33 and the lottery related to the second operating port 34, but the difference in advantage is not provided in each lottery. It may be configured. It is also possible to reverse the relationship of advantage and disadvantage so that the lottery related to the first operating port 33 is more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the second operating port 34.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, the special winning result can be won by the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33, but the special winning result is obtained in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration that does not win.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the game times related to the second operating port 34 are preferentially executed over the game times related to the first operating port 33, but the second operating port 34 has a configuration. The game times related to the first operating port 33 may be preferentially executed over the game times. Further, the game times related to the first operating port 33 and the game times related to the second operating port 34 may be executed in the order of acquisition of the hold information (winning order). Further, it is also possible to configure the game times related to the first operating port 33 and the game times related to the second operating port 34 to be executed in parallel.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the probability of a special winning result is set higher for the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 34 than for the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33. When a special hit result is obtained, the special game state is configured to function as a pseudo high-probability game state in which a big hit is made with a high probability by shifting to the high-frequency support mode by winning a V, but the high probability. The specific configuration for generating the gaming state is not limited to the above. For example, as a lottery mode based on winning a prize in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, as in a so-called probability change machine or ST machine, a low probability mode with a low winning probability and a high probability mode with a high winning probability are used. Is provided, and a high-probability gaming state may be generated by switching between the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the end reference number of times (the end reference number of times for the second operating port 34) in the first special gaming state is set to "1", but this number of times is arbitrary. For example, it may be twice or three or more times. However, in order to differentiate from the second special gaming state, it is preferable that the number of end reference times is less than "100" times.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, but one control device that integrates the functions of the respective control devices 82 and 212 may be provided. ..

(8) The second operating port 34 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball and a closed state that does not allow entry of the game ball, but allows entry of the game ball. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the ball can be switched between the first state and the second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the open state. Further, the same changes may be made to the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B.

(9) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. As a result, the present invention is also used in a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a medal when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reel is stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start rotation of a reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features A1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit (a function of acquiring hold information related to the second operating port 34 with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81).
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. The notification means (second operation) is set so that the game round operation is completed as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the second operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS for the mouth), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (open / close execution mode by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). With a function to execute migration processing)
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) that reaches the predetermined number of times in the second game state and the special information acquired during the predetermined game times and stored in the special information storage means. The special information carried over to the first gaming state is a gaming machine characterized in that the privilege given to the player when the winning result is obtained has a different configuration.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the value is different between the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round after the transition to the second game state on the advantageous side. To do. That is, there is a difference in the benefits depending on whether the winning result is obtained after the predetermined game times (during the second game state) or after the predetermined game times (during the first game state). Even if the special information is acquired based on the entry into the same starting ball entry section, if the value changes depending on the change in the situation in which the game is executed, the monotonization of the game can be suppressed and the game can be started. Can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention.

Feature A2. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit (a function of acquiring hold information related to the second operating port 34 with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81).
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. The notification means (second operation) is set so that the game round operation is completed as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the second operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS for the mouth), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (open / close execution mode by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). Function to execute migration process) and
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (for example, a second) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. 2 special game state) is provided,
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) that reaches the predetermined number of times in the second game state and the special information acquired during the predetermined game times and stored in the special information storage means. The information is a gaming machine characterized in that the privilege given to the player when the winning result is obtained has a different configuration.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entry portion, and it becomes easy to collect special information. Here, the value is different between the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round and the special information that was acquired during the predetermined game round and carried over to the first game state. That is, there is a difference in the benefits depending on whether the winning result is obtained after the predetermined game times (during the second game state) or after the predetermined game times (during the first game state). In other words, after the transition to the first gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry portion, and the game round progresses substantially limited to the special information stored during the second gaming state. It will be. Here, if the value of the special information acquired by entering the starting ball after the transition to the second gaming state changes depending on the situation in which the game is executed, the value of the game is changed. It can suppress monotonization and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A3. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit (a function of acquiring hold information related to the second operating port 34 with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81).
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. The notification means (second operation) is set so that the game round operation is completed as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the second operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS for the mouth), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to the special game state (open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (open / close execution mode by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). Function to execute migration process) and
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (for example, a second) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. 2 special game state) is provided,
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) that reaches the predetermined number of times in the second game state and the special information acquired during the second game state and stored in the special information storage means. The special information carried over to the first gaming state as it is is a gaming machine characterized in that the privilege given to the player when the winning result is obtained is different from the special information.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entry portion, and it becomes easy to collect special information. Here, the value is different between the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times in the second game state and the special information that was acquired during the second game state and carried over to the first game state. That is, there is a difference in the benefits depending on whether the winning result is obtained after the predetermined game times (during the second game state) or after the predetermined game times (during the first game state). In other words, after the transition to the first gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry portion, and the game round progresses substantially limited to the special information stored during the second gaming state. It will be. Here, if the value of the special information acquired by entering the starting ball after the transition to the second gaming state changes depending on the situation in which the game is executed, the value of the game is changed. It can suppress monotonization and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A4. As the predetermined number of times, a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times are provided.
When the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state corresponds to the winning result, in the second game state that shifts after the end of the special game state. The first predetermined number of times is set as the privilege,
If the special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, after the end of the special gaming state The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the second predetermined number of times is set as the privilege in the transitioning second gaming state.

As shown in this feature, if the predetermined number of times, which is the end reference number of times of the second game state, is different, the winning result is obtained during the first game state by the special information acquired during the second game state. In that case, the game shifts to the second game state again, and it becomes possible to re-challenge the winning in the predetermined game times. By enabling such a novel game progress, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is also possible to apply this feature to feature A2. In this case, the above description may be changed as follows. That is, "the first predetermined number of times and the second predetermined number of times are provided as the predetermined number of times, and the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state is the winning. When corresponding to the result, the first predetermined number of times is set as the privilege in the second gaming state that shifts after the end of the special gaming state, and the special information storage means is acquired during the predetermined gaming time. When the special information carried over to the first gaming state while being stored corresponds to the winning result, the second predetermined number of times as the privilege in the second gaming state that shifts after the end of the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature A2, which is characterized in that the configuration is set to. ”.

Feature A5. As the predetermined number of times, a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times are provided.
When the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times that reaches the predetermined number of times in the second game state corresponds to the winning result, the second game state that shifts after the end of the special game state Is set as the first predetermined number of times as the privilege,
If the special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, after the end of the special gaming state The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the second predetermined number of times is set as the privilege for the second gaming state to be shifted.

As shown in this feature, if the predetermined number of times, which is the end reference number of times of the second game state, is different, the winning result is obtained during the first game state by the special information acquired during the second game state. In that case, the game shifts to the second game state again, and it becomes possible to re-challenge the winning in the predetermined game times. By enabling such a novel game progress, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, by setting the first predetermined number of times> the second predetermined number of times, the winning result will be obtained in the predetermined game times, so that the flow of the game will be greatly inclined to the advantageous side, and whether the winning result will be obtained during the predetermined game times. The special information carried over to the first game state can be used to increase the sharpness of the winning result, and the monotonousness of the game can be preferably suppressed.

It is also possible to apply this feature to feature A2. In this case, the above description may be changed as follows. That is, "as the predetermined number of times, a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times are provided, and a trigger for starting the predetermined number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state. When the special information becomes corresponding to the winning result, the first predetermined number of times is set as the privilege for the second gaming state that shifts after the end of the special gaming state, and the second predetermined game If the special information acquired during the round and stored in the special information storage means and carried over to the first gaming state corresponds to the winning result, the second is transferred after the end of the special gaming state. Regarding the gaming state, the gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the second predetermined number of times is set as the privilege. "

Feature A6. The first predetermined number of times is larger than the upper limit of the number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means, and the second predetermined number of times is less than the upper limit. Game machine.

According to the feature A6, a practically preferable configuration can be realized in order to enhance the sharpness of the game. The first predetermined number of times may be set so that the next winning result is fixed or substantially fixed. With such a configuration, the difference in benefits can be clarified.

Feature A7. If the winning result is obtained by the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) that reaches the predetermined number of times in the second game state, it is acquired during the predetermined game times. It is characterized in that it is provided with a privilege granting means for granting a privilege larger than the case where the winning result is obtained by the special information carried over to the second gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A3.

As shown in this feature, if the privilege is given preferential treatment when the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, the tension of the game times in the predetermined game times can be increased. In addition, even if the winning result is not obtained in the predetermined game times, the player can re-challenge the privilege on the smaller side by the acquired special information, and the player cannot win the winning result in the predetermined game times. It is possible to preferably suppress a factor that rapidly reduces the motivation to play.

Feature A8. When the winning result is obtained by the special information acquired during the predetermined game rotation and stored in the special information storage means and carried over to the first game state, the special game triggered by the winning result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, which comprises means for shifting to the second gaming state after the end of the state.

As shown in this feature, if the winning result is obtained by the special information carried over to the first gaming state, the winning result can be re-challenged in the predetermined game times in a short cycle if the configuration is such that the player returns to the second gaming state. It becomes. By enabling such a novel game progress, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A9. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit (a function of acquiring hold information related to the second operating port 34 with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81).
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. The notification means (second operation) is set so that the game round operation is completed as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the second operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS for the mouth), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, the first special game state transition means (special by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. (A function to execute the process for transitioning to the winning game state) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) that reaches the predetermined number of times in the second game state and the special information acquired during the predetermined game times and stored in the special information storage means. The special information carried over to the first gaming state is given to the player when the winning result is obtained and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. A game machine characterized by having different benefits (time reductions).

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the value is different between the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round after the transition to the second game state on the advantageous side. To do. That is, the game depends on whether the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the predetermined game times (during the second game state) or the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the predetermined game times (during the first game state). There will be a difference in the benefits given to the person. Even if the special information is acquired based on the entry into the same starting ball entry section, if the value changes depending on the change in the situation in which the game is executed, the monotonization of the game can be suppressed and the game can be started. Can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention.

Feature A10. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit (a function of acquiring hold information related to the second operating port 34 with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81).
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. The notification means (second operation) is set so that the game round operation is completed as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the second operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS for the mouth), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, the first special game state transition means (opening / closing by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) shifts the gaming state from the predetermined gaming state to the first special gaming state (open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Function to execute the transition process to the execution mode) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. Function to execute the process for transition to the jackpot game state with MPU112) and
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (for example, a second) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. 2 special game state) is provided,
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) that reaches the predetermined number of times in the second game state and the special information acquired during the predetermined game times and stored in the special information storage means. The information has a configuration in which the privilege (time reduction number of times) given to the player when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result and the winning result is different. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entry portion, and it becomes easy to collect special information. Here, the value is different between the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round and the special information that was acquired during the predetermined game round and carried over to the first game state. That is, depending on whether the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the predetermined game times (during the second game state) or the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the predetermined game times (during the first game state). There will be a difference in benefits. In other words, after the transition to the first gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry portion, and the game round progresses substantially limited to the special information stored during the second gaming state. It will be. Here, if the value of the special information acquired by entering the starting ball after the transition to the second gaming state changes depending on the situation in which the game is executed, the value of the game is changed. It can suppress monotonization and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A11. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit (a function of acquiring hold information related to the second operating port 34 with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81).
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. The notification means (second operation) is set so that the game round operation is completed as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the second operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS for the mouth), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, the first special game state transition means (opening / closing by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) shifts the gaming state from the predetermined gaming state to the first special gaming state (open / close execution mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Function to execute the transition process to the execution mode) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. Function to execute the process for transition to the jackpot game state with MPU112) and
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (for example, a second) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. 2 special game state) is provided,
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) that reaches the predetermined number of times in the second game state and the special information acquired during the second game state and stored in the special information storage means. The special information carried over to the first game state as it is is given to the player when the winning result is obtained and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special game state triggered by the winning result. A game machine characterized by having different benefits (time reductions).

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entry portion, and it becomes easy to collect special information. Here, the value is different between the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times in the second game state and the special information that was acquired during the second game state and carried over to the first game state. That is, depending on whether the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the predetermined game round (during the second game state) or the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the predetermined game round (during the first game state). There will be a difference in benefits. In other words, after the transition to the first gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry portion, and the game round progresses substantially limited to the special information stored during the second gaming state. It will be. Here, if the value of the special information acquired by entering the starting ball after the transition to the second gaming state changes depending on the situation in which the game is executed, the value of the game is changed. It can suppress monotonization and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A12. As the predetermined number of times, a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times are provided.
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state corresponds to the winning result, and the predetermined during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. When the transition condition of is satisfied, the first predetermined number of times is set as the privilege in the second gaming state that shifts after the end of the second special gaming state.
The special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, and the first one triggered by the winning result. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the special gaming state, the second predetermined number of times is set as the privilege in the second gaming state that transitions after the end of the second special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A11.

As shown in this feature, if the predetermined number of times, which is the end reference number of times of the second game state, is different, the winning result during the first game state is determined by the special information acquired during the second game state. When the transition condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the second game state again, and the winning in the predetermined game times can be re-challenged. By enabling such a novel game progress, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention to the game.

It is also possible to apply this feature to feature A10. In this case, the above description may be changed as follows. That is, "the first predetermined number of times and the second predetermined number of times are provided as the predetermined number of times, and the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state is the winning. If the result is met and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the first predetermined number of times is set as the privilege in the second gaming state that transitions after the end of the second special gaming state, and the predetermined game When the special information acquired during the round and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the first 2. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the second predetermined number of times is set as the privilege in the second gaming state that shifts after the end of the special gaming state. "

Feature A13. As the predetermined number of times, a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times are provided.
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state corresponds to the winning result, and the predetermined during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. When the transition condition of is satisfied, the first predetermined number of times is set as the privilege for the second gaming state that shifts after the end of the second special gaming state.
The special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, and the first one triggered by the winning result. When the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the special gaming state, the second predetermined number of times is set as the privilege for the second gaming state that transitions after the end of the second special gaming state. Features The gaming machine according to A3.

As shown in this feature, if the predetermined number of times, which is the end reference number of times of the second game state, is different, the winning result is obtained during the first game state by the special information acquired during the second game state. In that case, the game shifts to the second game state again, and it becomes possible to re-challenge the winning in the predetermined game times. By enabling such a novel game progress, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention to the game.

In particular, by setting the first predetermined number of times> the second predetermined number of times, the winning result will be obtained in the predetermined game times, so that the flow of the game will be greatly inclined to the advantageous side, and whether the winning result will be obtained during the predetermined game times. The special information carried over to the first game state can be used to increase the sharpness of the winning result, and the monotonousness of the game can be preferably suppressed.

It is also possible to apply this feature to feature A10. In this case, the above description may be changed as follows. That is, "as the predetermined number of times, a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times are provided, and a trigger for starting the predetermined number of times that the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state. If the special information becomes corresponding to the winning result and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result, the transition is made after the end of the special gaming state. As for the second gaming state, the first predetermined number of times is set as the privilege, and the special information acquired during the second predetermined game round and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means. Corresponds to the winning result, and if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result, the second gaming state shifts after the end of the special gaming state. The game machine according to the feature A10, wherein the second predetermined number of times is set as the privilege. ”

Feature A14. The first predetermined number of times is larger than the upper limit of the number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means, and the second predetermined number of times is less than the upper limit. Game machine.

According to the feature A14, a practically preferable configuration can be realized in order to enhance the sharpness of the game. The first predetermined number of times may be set so that the next winning result is fixed or substantially fixed. With such a configuration, the difference in benefits can be clarified.

Feature A15. In the second game state, the winning result is obtained by the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) that reaches the predetermined number of times, and the first special game state triggered by the winning result. If the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the winning result is obtained by the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and carried over to the second game state while being stored in the special information storage means. Features A9 to A11 characterized in that the player is provided with a privilege granting means for granting a privilege larger than that when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. The gaming machine described in any one of.

As shown in this feature, if the privilege is given preferential treatment when the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, the tension of the game times in the predetermined game times can be increased. In addition, even if the winning result is not obtained in the predetermined game times, the player can re-challenge the privilege on the smaller side by the acquired special information, and the player cannot win the winning result in the predetermined game times. It is possible to preferably suppress a factor that rapidly reduces the motivation to play.

Feature A16. When the winning result is obtained by the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and stored in the special information storage means and carried over to the first game state, the first winning result is used as an opportunity. The feature A9 to the feature A15, which comprises means for shifting to the second gaming state after the end of the second special gaming state, which has been shifted based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition during the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any one.

As shown in this feature, if the special information carried over to the first game state results in a winning result and the player returns to the second game state depending on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition during the first special game state, a short cycle is provided. It will be possible to re-challenge the winning in the prescribed game times. By enabling such a novel game progress, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of attention to the game.

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature B1. It is provided with a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 90) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. Notifying means (for the operating port) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the special information storage means, with the end of the game round operation as one game round. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a special game state transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. The 81 MPU 112 has a function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided. Has been
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game times) in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the subsequent special stored in the special information storage means. Special notification means (display of "V × 7", etc.) that identifies how many special information corresponding to the winning result is included in the information and executes special notification (display of "V × 7", etc.) based on the specific result during the predetermined game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).

In the configuration shown in this feature, in the predetermined game times in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the subsequent special information stored in the special information storage means is used. The number of special information corresponding to the winning result is specified, and the special notification based on the specific result is executed during the predetermined game round. In other words, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, the number of winning results is also notified, so that the player is more satisfied than the winning result. be able to. By performing such a novel result notification, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

In addition, the description of "a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state" is described as "a second gaming state in which the determination result by the special information determination means is more likely to be the winning result than the first gaming state". It is also possible to say.

Feature B2. It is provided with a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 90) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. Notifying means (for the operating port) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the special information storage means, with the end of the game round operation as one game round. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a special game state transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. The 81 MPU 112 has a function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. (Function to shift from the 1st special gaming state to the 3rd special gaming state) and
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. It is specified how many special information corresponding to the winning result is included in the subsequent special information, and a special notification (display of "V × 7", etc.) based on the specific result is sent during the predetermined game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a special notification means for executing (a function of executing a winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).

In the configuration shown in this feature, in the predetermined game times (final game times) in the second game state on the advantageous side, when the judgment result by the special information judgment means is the winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. It is specified how many special information corresponding to the winning result is included in the subsequent special information, and the special notification based on the specific result is executed during the predetermined game round. In other words, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, the number of winning results is also notified, so that the player is more satisfied than the winning result. be able to. By performing such a novel result notification, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

Feature B3. A game rotation effect executing means (design display device 41 and notification / effect control device 82) for executing the game rotation effect in parallel with the game rotation operation is provided.
The game rotation effect executing means executes a winning effect indicating that the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result before the game rotation operation is completed in the predetermined game times. (A function to execute a stop display of the "V" symbol combination in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).
The special notification means is characterized in that the special notification is executed after the winning effect is shown by the winning effect by the winning effect means. The game machine described.

According to the feature B3, after the winning effect is executed, the number of winning results is also notified, so that the degree of attention to the predetermined game times can be dramatically improved. ..

Feature B4. In the winning effect, the winning effect means that the determination result is the winning result by stopping and displaying the pattern corresponding to the winning result on the display screen (display screen G). And
The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the special notification means is configured to execute the special notification using the pattern.

As shown in this feature, by performing special notification using the pattern used for the winning effect, it is possible to give a correlation between the winning effect and the special effect and construct an integrated effect.

Feature B5. Described in feature B3 or feature B4, wherein the special notification means includes means for determining special information to be a specific target when the winning result is indicated by the winning effect means. Game machine.

By determining a specific target when the winning result is shown by the winning effect, it is possible to shift to the special notification without delay.

Feature B6. When the winning result is shown by the winning effect means, the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is set to a specified number which is the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the special information storage means. A launch suggestion means for suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion to the player based on the fact that the ball has not been reached is provided.
The special notification means is characterized in that it is configured to specify how many special information corresponding to the winning result is included after the suggestion by the launch suggestion means and execute the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of B3 and B5.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to prevent the number of special information stored when the special notification is executed from becoming extremely small, and to easily increase the number of special information to a specified number. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of inconvenience such that the effect shown in the feature B1 or the like is not exhibited well due to lack of special information.

Feature B7. The special notification means has reached a predetermined number in which the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the special information storage means by a preset determination timing. If not, the gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B4, characterized in that the identification is performed for the special information stored up to the determination timing.

There is a limit to the execution period of the game times in the predetermined game times. Therefore, if the number of special information stored in the special information storage means has not reached the specified number by the preset determination timing, the special information stored by the determination timing is specified as the target. By performing the above, it is possible to preferably avoid pressure on the execution period of the special notification.

Feature B8. The special notification means has reached a predetermined number in which the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the special information storage means by a preset determination timing. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B1 to feature B4, characterized in that the special notification is not performed when there is no special notification.

When the number of stored special information does not reach the specified number, it is possible to preferably avoid a decrease in reliability of the special notification by configuring the configuration so that the special notification is not performed.

Feature B9. When the winning result is shown by the winning effect means, the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is set to a specified number which is the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the special information storage means. A launch suggestion means for suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion to the player based on the fact that the ball has not been reached is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B8, wherein the launch suggestion means is configured not to give the suggestion during the special notification.

According to the configuration shown in the feature B9, it is possible to reduce the chance of entering the starting ball → acquiring special information during the special notification. This is preferable in order to prevent a discrepancy between the number of times the winning result is actually obtained and the number of times indicated by the special notification due to the addition of new special information during the special notification.

Feature B10. A game rotation effect executing means (design display device 41 and notification / effect control device 82) for executing the game rotation effect in parallel with the game rotation operation is provided.
The game rotation effect executing means executes a winning effect indicating that the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result before the game rotation operation is completed in the predetermined game times. (A function to execute a stop display of the "V" symbol combination in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).
The special notification means is characterized in that the special notification is executed at the timing indicated by the winning effect by the winning effect means to be the winning result. The game machine described in.

As shown in this feature, the impact of the predetermined game times can be strengthened by configuring the special notification to be executed at the same timing as the winning result is shown.

Feature B11. It is provided with a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 90) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. Notifying means (for the operating port) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the special information storage means, with the end of the game round operation as one game round. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. To the first special game state transition means (to the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. (A function to execute the process for transitioning to the special hit game state) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided. Has been
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game times) in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the subsequent special stored in the special information storage means. Special notification means (display of "V × 7", etc.) that identifies how many special information corresponding to the winning result is included in the information and executes special notification (display of "V × 7", etc.) based on the specific result during the predetermined game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).

In the configuration shown in this feature, in the predetermined game times in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the subsequent special information stored in the special information storage means is used. The number of special information corresponding to the winning result is specified, and the special notification based on the specific result is executed during the predetermined game round. In other words, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, the number of winning results is also notified, so that the player is more satisfied than the winning result. be able to. By performing such a novel result notification, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

In addition, the description of "a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state" is described as "a second gaming state in which the determination result by the special information determination means is more likely to be the winning result than the first gaming state". It is also possible to say.

Feature B12. It is provided with a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 90) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. Notifying means (for the operating port) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the special information storage means, with the end of the game round operation as one game round. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the first result which is the winning result (special hit result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation control means uses the game rotation control means as a notification result corresponding to the first result. The first special game state transition means (mainly) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the end of the operation. The function of executing the process for shifting to the special hit game state by the MPU 112 of the control device 81) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, or the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information. As a result, when the game rotation operation is completed as a notification result corresponding to the second result by the game rotation control means, the second special game state transition means (main control device 81) shifts to the second special game state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. (Function to shift from the 1st special gaming state to the 3rd special gaming state) and
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. It is specified how many special information corresponding to the winning result is included in the subsequent special information, and a special notification (display of "V × 7", etc.) based on the specific result is sent during the predetermined game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a special notification means for executing (a function of executing a winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).

In the configuration shown in this feature, in the predetermined game times (final game times) in the second game state on the advantageous side, when the judgment result by the special information judgment means is the winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. It is specified how many special information corresponding to the winning result is included in the subsequent special information, and the special notification based on the specific result is executed during the predetermined game round. In other words, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, the number of winning results is also notified, so that the player is more satisfied than the winning result. be able to. By performing such a novel result notification, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature B3 to feature B10 may be applied to feature B11 to feature B12.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the features B1 to B12 described in detail above.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature C1. It is provided with a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 90) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. Notifying means (for the operating port) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the special information storage means, with the end of the game round operation as one game round. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a special game state transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. The 81 MPU 112 has a function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. Based on each special information that has been stored, the number of times that the winning result is obtained in a plurality of game times including the game times related to each stored special information and the game times related to special information that has not yet been stored is determined. Estimating means for estimating (a function of executing the continuous hit count calculation process in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82),
It is characterized by having an estimation result notification means (a function of executing a winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82) that notifies the estimation result by the estimation means by the time the next game round is started. A game machine to be.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the predetermined game times in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the subsequent special stored in the special information storage means. With reference to the information, it is estimated that the number of times the winning result is obtained in a plurality of game times including the game times related to each stored special information and the game times related to the special information not yet stored. Then, this estimation result will be notified by the estimation result notification means by the time the next game round is started. With such a configuration, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, the number of winning results is also notified, so that the satisfaction is more than simply the winning result. A feeling can be given to the player. By performing such a novel result notification, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the maximum value of the number of times of the winning result estimated by the estimation means is larger than the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the special information storage means.

According to the feature C2, since the estimation result notification means may notify a number exceeding the storage upper limit number of the special information, the impact when the notification is performed becomes extremely large. This is advantageous in increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C3. The estimation means is configured to estimate the number of times that the winning result including the winning result in the predetermined game times is obtained during the predetermined game times.
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the estimation result notification means is configured to notify the estimation result during the predetermined game rotation.

As shown in feature C3, by configuring the configuration to notify the estimation result during the predetermined game round and to include the winning result in the predetermined game round in the estimation result, the impact and appearance of the notified estimation result are preferable. Can be improved.

Feature C4. If the number of special information stored in the special information storage means does not reach the reference number, the estimation by the estimation means is not performed or the notification by the estimation result notification means is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C3.

In the configuration shown in the feature C1 or the like, if the number of stored special information is small, it means that the number of guessing elements for guessing how the branch such as the transition destination of the game state proceeds is reduced. There is a concern that the reliability of the notification will be low, or the number of winning results to be notified will be underestimated, and the impact of the notification will be weakened. In view of such circumstances, it is inconvenient to configure the configuration in which the estimation or the notification of the estimation result is avoided when the stored special information does not reach the reference number (for example, the upper limit number of storage). It has the technical significance of being able to suppress the occurrence.

Feature C5. The predetermined game times are characterized in that the launch suggestion means for suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion to the player is provided before the estimation by the estimation means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C4.

As described above, it is preferable to earn as much special information as possible in order to increase the impact and reliability of the estimated result to be notified. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the launch is suggested to the starting ball entry portion before the estimation, the number of special information that can be referred to at the time of estimation can be obtained.

Feature C6. When the predetermined game times are executed again under the situation where the estimation result is notified by the estimation result notification means, the estimation result being notified can be updated based on the new estimation result by the estimation means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C5, which is characterized in that.

According to the feature C5, the winning result scheduled to be generated continues seamlessly, which gives the player a sense of security and can dramatically increase the satisfaction of the player.

Feature C7. A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode.
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode.
The number of consecutive times (for example, the number of consecutive villas) in which the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state and the winning result is obtained without shifting to the first gaming state is a specified number of times (for example, 4). When the number of times is reached, the first transition means (function of shifting to the third special gaming state by the limiter operation in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) to shift to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state.
When the winning result is obtained during the second gaming state and the continuous number of times the winning result is obtained without shifting to the first gaming state has not reached the specified number of times, the second after the end of the special gaming state. It is equipped with a second transition means (a function of shifting to the second special gaming state in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) to shift to the gaming state.
When the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the gaming state and the game that shift after the end of the special gaming state according to the gaming state staying at the time of the winning result. At least one of the number of games maintained in the state is different,
The estimation means
A state estimation means for estimating the transition of the game state after all the game times related to the special information stored in the special information storage means have been executed, and a state estimation means.
It has a remaining number calculation means for calculating the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is reached after all the game times related to the special information stored in the special information storage means are executed.
The game times related to each special information stored in the special information storage means are still stored based on the transition of the game state estimated by the state estimation means and the remaining number of times calculated by the remaining number calculation means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C1 to the feature C6, which is configured to estimate the number of times the winning result is obtained in combination with the game times related to the special information which is not provided.

As shown in this feature, the game times related to each special information stored in the special information storage means based on the transition of the game state estimated by the state estimation means and the remaining number of times calculated by the remaining number of times calculation means. By configuring the configuration to estimate the number of times the winning result is obtained in the game times related to the special information that has not been memorized yet, the estimation function shown in the feature C1 or the like can be suitably realized.

Feature C8. It is provided with a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 90) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. Notifying means (for the operating port) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the special information storage means, with the end of the game round operation as one game round. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. To the first special game state transition means (to the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. (A function to execute the process for transitioning to the special hit game state) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. Based on each special information that has been stored, the number of times that the winning result is obtained in a plurality of game times including the game times related to each stored special information and the game times related to special information that has not yet been stored is determined. Estimating means for estimating (a function of executing the continuous hit count calculation process in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82),
It is characterized by having an estimation result notification means (a function of executing a winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82) that notifies the estimation result by the estimation means by the time the next game round is started. A game machine to be.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the predetermined game times in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the subsequent special stored in the special information storage means. With reference to the information, it is estimated that the number of times the winning result is obtained in a plurality of game times including the game times related to each stored special information and the game times related to the special information not yet stored. Then, this estimation result will be notified by the estimation result notification means by the time the next game round is started. With such a configuration, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, the number of winning results is also notified, so that the satisfaction is more than simply the winning result. A feeling can be given to the player. By performing such a novel result notification, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

Feature C9. It is provided with a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 90) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. Notifying means (for the operating port) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the special information storage means, with the end of the game round operation as one game round. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a special game state transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. The 81 MPU 112 has a function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. Based on each special information that has been stored, the number of times that the winning result is obtained in a plurality of game times including the game times related to each stored special information and the game times related to special information that has not yet been stored is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a suggestion means for suggesting to a player (a function of executing a winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the predetermined game times in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the subsequent special stored in the special information storage means. With reference to the information, the number of times that the winning result is obtained in a plurality of game times including the game times related to each stored special information and the game times related to the special information that has not been memorized is the next game time. Will be suggested to the player by the time is started. With such a configuration, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, it is also suggested how many more winning results are reserved, so that the satisfaction is more than simply the winning result. A feeling can be given to the player. By performing such a novel result notification, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

Feature C10. It is provided with a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry unit (actuated ball entry unit 90) provided in the game area (game area PE) and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 402 of the main control device 81 executes a win / fail determination process or the like) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). Function) and
The game rotation operation (picture display) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result is the said. Notifying means (for the operating port) so that the game round operation is performed for each game round according to the special information stored in the special information storage means, with the end of the game round operation as one game round. Game times control means (a function of executing display control of the display unit BS for the operating port by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the first result which is the winning result (special hit result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation control means uses the game rotation control means as a notification result corresponding to the first result. The first special game state transition means (mainly) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the end of the operation. The function of executing the process for shifting to the special hit game state by the MPU 112 of the control device 81) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, or the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information. As a result, when the game rotation operation is completed as a notification result corresponding to the second result by the game rotation control means, the second special game state transition means (main control device 81) shifts to the second special game state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. MPU 112 has a function to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state at the time of time saving digestion).
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game time) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. Based on each special information that has been stored, the number of times that the winning result is obtained in a plurality of game times including the game times related to each stored special information and the game times related to special information that has not yet been stored is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a suggestion means for suggesting to a player (a function of executing a winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the predetermined game times in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the subsequent special stored in the special information storage means. With reference to the information, the number of times that the winning result is obtained in a plurality of game times including the game times related to each stored special information and the game times related to the special information that has not been memorized is the next game time. Will be suggested to the player by the time is started. With such a configuration, if the winning result is obtained in the predetermined game times, it is also suggested how many more winning results are reserved, so that the satisfaction is more than simply the winning result. A feeling can be given to the player. By performing such a novel result notification, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature C2 to feature C7 may be applied to feature C8 to feature C10.

Further, it is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the feature B group to the features C1 to C10 described in detail above.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a special game state transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. The 81 MPU 112 has a function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. (Function to shift from the 1st special gaming state to the 3rd special gaming state) and
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game times) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the winning effect is executed. The effect execution means (the function of executing the stop display of the "V" symbol combination and the winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82) and
Execution of non-winning effect to execute non-winning effect when the determination result by the special information determination means is a non-winning result (disappearance result) in the predetermined game times when the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state. It is provided with means (a function of stopping display of a "failure" symbol and executing introduction effects A and B in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).
As the non-winning effect, a plurality of non-winning effects having different production modes are provided.
The non-winning effect executing means is an effect mode determining means for determining a non-winning effect to be executed among the plurality of non-winning effects based on the number of special information stored in the special information storage means. A game machine characterized by having.

According to the feature D1, when the final game times in the second game state correspond to the non-winning result, the mode of the non-winning effect is set according to the number of special information stored in the special information storage means. It will be different. In this way, by configuring the configuration in which the production mode of the final game round in the second game state changes depending on the state of entry into the starting ball entry portion in the second game state, it contributes to the improvement of the degree of attention to the final game round. it can.

Feature D2. The plurality of non-winning effects include a first effect and a second effect.
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit, the effect mode determining means determines the first effect as the execution target and stores the first effect in the special information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the second effect is determined as the execution target when the number of special information is not reached the upper limit.

As shown in the feature D2, the effect shown in the feature D1 can be suitably exhibited by making the effect mode different depending on whether or not at least the number of stored special information has reached the upper limit.

Feature D3. A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode.
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the second switching mode.

As shown in this feature, by making the second gaming state correspond to the second switching mode and facilitating entry into the starting ball entry section, the effect mode is changed depending on whether or not the upper limit shown in feature D2 is reached. It is possible to preferably avoid the function not being exhibited well.

Feature D4. In the predetermined game times when the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, the game turn effect executed in parallel with the predetermined game times is executed before the notification of the determination result by the special information determination means. It is composed of one part and a second part that is executed after the notification of the judgment result.
The winning effect executing means executes the winning effect as an effect in the second part, and the non-winning effect executing means executes the non-winning effect as an effect in the second part. ,
Any of the features D1 to D3, wherein the effect mode determining means is configured to determine a non-winning effect to be executed during the first part or at the time of transition to the second part. The game machine described in one.

As shown in this feature, when the predetermined game is composed of two parts, the first part and the second part, the special information in which the production mode of the non-winning effect in the second part after the result notification is stored is stored. By making the configuration different depending on the number of the results, it is possible to preferably suppress the effect from becoming monotonous even after the result is notified.

Feature D5. When shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the special information stored by the special information storage means during the second gaming state is the special information stored from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. It is structured so that the more special information that is carried over to, the more advantageous it is to the player.
The plurality of non-winning effects include a first effect and a second effect.
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit, the effect mode determining means determines the first effect as the execution target and stores the first effect in the special information storage means. When the number of special information is not reached the upper limit, the second effect is determined as the execution target.
The second effect includes the display of an image suggesting the player to launch the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion, and the first effect does not include the display of the suggested image. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D1 to the feature D4.

According to the feature D5, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the more special information carried over from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the more advantageous the player is. There is. In such a configuration, after being notified that the result is a non-winning result, the game can be advantageously advanced by increasing the number of special information to the upper limit by the end of the game round. Therefore, in the second production, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by suppressing the disadvantage of the player as a configuration including the display of an image suggesting the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion to the player. ..

Feature D6. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
With special information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information related to the operating port) based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion (a function of acquiring the holding information related to the operating port with the MPU 112 of the main control device 81). ,
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (MPU 112 of the main control device 81) executes a win / fail determination process or the like to determine whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, winning information). Function to do) and
When the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, the special gaming state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state is shifted. The game state transition means (a function of executing the transition process to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) and
A third state that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which entry is more difficult or impossible than the accepted state. 1 variable ball entry section (2nd variable winning device 32B) and
A first switching means for switching the first variable ball entry unit between the non-accepted state and the accepted state (a function of controlling the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 32B by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81).
A third state that can be switched between an accepted state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepted state (closed state) in which entry is more difficult or impossible than the accepted state. 2 variable ball entry section (1st variable winning device 32A) and
It is provided with a second switching means (a function of controlling the opening and closing of the first variable winning device 32A by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the second variable ball entry unit between the non-accepted state and the accepted state.
As the special determination information, the first determination information (numerical information that becomes a special hit) and the second determination information (numerical information that becomes a big hit) are included.
The first switching means is the first when the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (special hit result) corresponding to the first determination information and shifts to the special gaming state. The variable ball entry section is configured to switch to the receiving state.
The second switching means shifts to the special gaming state as a second determination result (big hit result) that the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the second determination information, or the first. When the game ball passes through the predetermined area (V winning area) of the first variable ball entry section as a determination result, the second variable ball entry section is switched to the acceptance state.
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (second) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. (Special game state) is provided,
The starting ball entry section and the second variable ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. (Function to shift from the 1st special gaming state to the 3rd special gaming state) and
It is provided with a launch suggestion means for suggesting to the player the launch of the game ball toward the predetermined flow path in the second gaming state.
The launch suggestion means executes the first suggestion as the suggestion when the determination result by the special information determination means is the first determination result in the predetermined game times in the second game state, and the second game. A gaming machine characterized in that a second suggestion is executed as the suggestion when the determination result by the special information determination means is a non-winning result (disappearance result) in the predetermined game times in the state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the first determination result is obtained in the second game state, the ball can be entered into the first variable ball entry section, and a predetermined area (V winning area) in the first variable ball entry section is possible. ) Allows the ball to enter the second variable ball entry section. That is, in order to advance the game advantageously, it is necessary to launch the game ball toward the first variable entry portion after the end of the second game state. On the other hand, when the second game state ends without a winning result in the second game state, the process shifts to the first game state. In the first game state, it becomes impossible or difficult to enter the starting ball, so that the game proceeds substantially according to the special information carried over from the second game state. That is, in order to proceed with the game in the first game state, it is necessary to secure special information in advance, and securing as many special information as possible (preferably up to the upper limit) is advantageous for the game. You can proceed. Here, in this feature, when the first determination result (winning result) is obtained in the final game round in the second game state, the first suggestion is executed, and the final game round in the second game state is not. If it is a winning result, the second suggestion is executed. With such a configuration, by encouraging the player to enter the starting ball entry section and the first variable entry section (predetermined area), it becomes impossible for the player to enjoy the benefits that the player originally can enjoy due to the complexity of the game. Can be preferably avoided. This is preferable in order to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game.

Feature D7. The launch suggestion means is a case where the determination result by the special information determination means is a non-winning result (disappearance result) in the predetermined game times in the second game state, and is stored in the special information storage means. The second suggestion is executed when the number of special information is not reached the upper limit, which is the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the special information storage means.
In the case where the determination result by the special information determination means is a non-winning result (disappearance result) in the predetermined game times in the second game state, the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is The gaming machine according to feature D6, which comprises a special effect executing means for executing a special effect instead of the second suggestion when the upper limit of the specified number is reached.

If a non-winning result is obtained in a predetermined game, the number of stored special information may have reached the upper limit. In such a case, the satisfaction level of the player can be suitably increased by executing a special effect instead of the second suggestion.

Feature D8. The launch suggestion means so that the suggestion start timing when the second suggestion is executed in the predetermined game round is earlier than the suggestion start timing when the first suggestion is executed in the predetermined game round. The gaming machine according to feature D6 or feature D7, which is characterized by being configured.

As shown in this feature, the start timing of the suggestion in the case of the non-winning result → the second gaming state is advanced, and the timing of the suggestion in the case of the first judgment result → the special gaming state is delayed, so that the ball is wasted. It is possible to preferably suppress the loss of benefits that the player should originally be able to enjoy while reducing the number of players.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D6 to D8, wherein the maximum execution period of the second suggestion is configured to be longer than the maximum execution period of the first suggestion.

As shown in this feature, by differentiating so that the maximum execution period of the second suggestion is longer than the maximum execution period of the first suggestion, the benefits that the player should originally be able to enjoy while reducing the wasted balls are missed. It can be suitably suppressed.

Feature D10. The launch suggestion means continues the first suggestion even after the end of the second gaming state when the first suggestion is executed, while the launch suggestion means continues the first suggestion when the second suggestion is executed. 2 When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches a specified number which is the upper limit of the special information that can be stored by the special information storage means during the game state, or the number of the special information is said. The gaming machine according to any one of features D6 to D9, characterized in that the second suggestion is terminated when the second gaming state ends without reaching the specified number.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the technical idea shown in feature D6 can be suitably embodied.

Feature D11. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. To the first special game state transition means (to the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. (A function to execute the process for transitioning to the special hit game state) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The first game state transition means (main control device 81) that shifts to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, once) without the winning result. (Function to shift from the 1st special gaming state to the 3rd special gaming state) and
In the predetermined game times (for example, the first game times) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state, when the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the winning effect is executed. The effect execution means (the function of executing the stop display of the "V" symbol combination and the winning number suggestion effect in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82) and
Execution of non-winning effect to execute non-winning effect when the determination result by the special information determination means is a non-winning result (disappearance result) in the predetermined game times when the predetermined number of times is reached in the second game state. It is provided with means (a function of stopping display of a "failure" symbol and executing introduction effects A and B in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82).
As the non-winning effect, a plurality of non-winning effects having different production modes are provided.
The non-winning effect executing means is an effect mode determining means for determining a non-winning effect to be executed among the plurality of non-winning effects based on the number of special information stored in the special information storage means. A game machine characterized by having.

According to the feature D11, when the final game times in the second game state correspond to the non-winning result, the mode of the non-winning effect is set according to the number of special information stored in the special information storage means. It will be different. In this way, by configuring the configuration in which the production mode of the final game round in the second game state changes depending on the state of entry into the starting ball entry portion in the second game state, it contributes to the improvement of the degree of attention to the final game round. it can.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature D2 to feature D5 may be applied to feature D11.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to C to the features D1 to D11 described in detail above.

<Feature E group>
The following feature group E describes "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a first transition means (main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a special gaming state) to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode with the MPU 112)
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (first) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. (Special game state) is provided,
In the second game state, the result of the determination by the special information determination means becomes a non-winning result (disappearance result), and the game rotation control means terminates the game rotation operation as a notification result corresponding to the non-winning result. A second transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the first special gaming state by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the above.
A special effect execution means (notification / effect) that starts a special effect (challenge effect) with the transition to the second game state and ends the special effect when the game rotation operation in the second game state ends. The MPU 242 of the control device 82 has a function to execute the process for the challenge effect).
In the first game state, the game turn operation by the game turn control means is executed based on the remaining special information acquired during the second game state.
The special effect execution means is
A part transfer means for shifting the special effect from the first part to the second part when the game turn operation by the game turn control means is started in the second game state.
In the second part, the advance notification means for notifying the determination result by the special information determination means prior to the end of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is provided.
The first suggestion means for suggesting to the player the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion when shifting to the second gaming state, and the first suggestion means.
It is characterized by including a second suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the game ball is launched toward the starting ball entry portion during the remaining period of the game rotation operation after the advance notification by the advance notification means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature E1, in the second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, it is easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entry section. A special effect is started with the transition to the second game state, and the game ball launched according to the suggestion by the first suggestion means enters the start ball entry section to start the game rotation operation and the special effect. Moves from the first part to the second part. After that, the determination result is notified in advance prior to the end of the game rotation operation. Then, after the advance notification, the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion is suggested by the second suggestion means, and the special information can be acquired → stored by launching the game ball according to the suggestion. After shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the game times are executed based on the special information acquired → stored during the second gaming state, but the first suggestion means described above. The lack of special information for the gaming state can be suitably suppressed. In this way, if the configuration is such that the opportunity to acquire the special information is secured after the advance notification of the result, the player can concentrate on the production until the result is notified in the second part of the special production. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game while realizing the rapid progress of the special effect for the advance notification (while reducing the waiting for the effect progress).

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the first suggestion means ends the suggestion by the first suggestion means when at least one ball enters the starting ball entry portion occurs.

According to the feature E2, in order to advance the special effect (start the game rotation operation), it is sufficient that at least one special information is acquired after the transition to the second game state. Therefore, if the suggestion is terminated when at least one ball enters the starting ball entry portion, the effect shown in the feature E1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E3. The second suggestion means has means for terminating the suggestion by the second suggestion means when the number of special information stored by the special information storage means reaches the upper limit of storage by the special information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, which is characterized in that it is used.

As shown in feature E3, the suggestion by the second suggestion means is configured to end when the number of special information reaches the upper limit, so that the player's attention is directed from the movement of the game ball toward the starting ball entry section. You can be encouraged to return to the special production promptly. This is preferable in order to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention by the special effect.

Feature E4. The first suggestion means does not make the suggestion by the first suggestion means when the special information stored by the special information storage means exists at the time of transition to the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E1 to the feature E3, which is characterized in that.

As shown in feature E4, if special information has already been acquired at the time of transition to the second gaming state, no suggestion is made, thereby preferably realizing a configuration that does not hinder the player's concentration on the special production. it can.

Feature E5. The special effect executing means is such that the period from the advance notification to the end of the special effect is longer than the period from the start of the second part of the special effect to the advance notification. The gaming machine according to any one of feature E1 to feature E4, characterized in that the timing is specified.

According to the configuration shown in the feature E5, it is possible to secure a long grace period for acquiring the special information after the advance notification is executed in the special effect. This is preferable in order to suppress the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state without acquiring the special information up to the upper limit of the memory due to the lack of the grace period.

Feature E6. A third transition means for shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the suggestion by the first suggestion means is executed so as to straddle the special gaming state and the second gaming state.

According to the feature E6, by making a suggestion for the second gaming state from the special gaming state, the ball enters the starting ball entry section after the state transition (after switching to the second switching mode), that is, from the first part. The transition to the second part can proceed quickly. This is preferable in suppressing the extension between the first parts.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E6, wherein the suggestion by the second suggestion means is emphasized more than the suggestion by the first suggestion means.

In the configuration in which the game rotation in the second gaming state is started by entering the starting ball entry portion, the player is not substantially disadvantaged even if the entry timing is slightly delayed. On the other hand, if the special information cannot be sufficiently acquired during the second game state (the latter half of the game times), the number of game times executed after the transition to the first game state is reduced, and the player May suffer disadvantages. In this respect, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by emphasizing the suggestion by the second suggestion means rather than the suggestion by the first suggestion means. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in reliability of the gaming machine due to the complexity of the game.

Feature E8. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. To the first special game state transition means (to the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. (A function to execute the process for transitioning to the special hit game state) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. Function to execute the process for transition to the jackpot game state with MPU112) and
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (first) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. (Special game state) is provided,
In the second game state, the result of the determination by the special information determination means becomes a non-winning result (disappearance result), and the game rotation control means terminates the game rotation operation as a notification result corresponding to the non-winning result. A second transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the first special gaming state by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the above.
A special effect execution means (notification / effect) that starts a special effect (challenge effect) with the transition to the second game state and ends the special effect when the game rotation operation in the second game state ends. The MPU 242 of the control device 82 has a function to execute the process for the challenge effect).
In the first game state, the game turn operation by the game turn control means is executed based on the remaining special information acquired during the second game state.
The special effect execution means is
A part transfer means for shifting the special effect from the first part to the second part when the game turn operation by the game turn control means is started in the second game state.
In the second part, the advance notification means for notifying the determination result by the special information determination means prior to the end of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is provided.
The first suggestion means for suggesting to the player the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion when shifting to the second gaming state, and the first suggestion means.
It is characterized by including a second suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the game ball is launched toward the starting ball entry portion during the remaining period of the game rotation operation after the advance notification by the advance notification means. A game machine to be.

According to the feature E8, in the second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, it is easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entry section. A special effect is started with the transition to the second game state, and the game ball launched according to the suggestion by the first suggestion means enters the start ball entry section to start the game rotation operation and the special effect. Moves from the first part to the second part. After that, the determination result is notified in advance prior to the end of the game rotation operation. Then, after the advance notification, the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion is suggested by the second suggestion means, and the special information can be acquired → stored by launching the game ball according to the suggestion. After shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the game times are executed based on the special information acquired → stored during the second gaming state, but the first suggestion means described above. The lack of special information for the gaming state can be suitably suppressed. In this way, if the configuration is such that the opportunity to acquire the special information is secured after the advance notification of the result, the player can concentrate on the production until the result is notified in the second part of the special production. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game while realizing the rapid progress of the special effect for the advance notification (while reducing the waiting for the effect progress).

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature E1 to feature E7 may be applied to feature E8.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to D to the features E1 to E8 described in detail above.

<Characteristic F group>
The following feature F group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features F1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a special game state transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. The 81 MPU 112 has a function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
When the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state, the configuration (presence or absence of limiter operation) capable of shifting to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. It has become
When shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the special information stored by the special information storage means during the second gaming state is the special information stored from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. It is structured so that the more special information that is carried over to, the more advantageous it is to the player.
In the launch suggestion means (for example, the symbol display device 41 or the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82) that suggests the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion to the player when the second gaming state is reached. (Function to execute processing for right-handed notification) and
In the game times executed in the second game state and the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the number of the special information stored in the special information storage means is determined by the special information storage means. It is provided with an emphasizing means (a function of executing a right-handed notification emphasizing process in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82) when the memorable upper limit is not reached. A game machine featuring.

In the configuration shown in the feature F1, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the special information acquired and stored during the second gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. It is structured so that the more special information that is carried over, the more advantageous it is to the player. In the second gaming state, since the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the movement for the game rotation and the production performed during the game rotation, and the attention to the starting ball entry portion is focused. I think it will drop. Here, in the second game state, if the winning result is obtained, the player can shift to the first game state, so that the player's attention remains toward the production and the acquisition of special information is neglected. There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you should have obtained. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in the game times in which the winning result is obtained in the second game state, if the number of stored special information does not reach the upper limit, the suggestion by the launch suggestion means is given. Be emphasized. In this way, by urging the player to acquire the special information, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the shortage of the number of special information at the time of transition to the first gaming state. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

Feature F2. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a first transition means (main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a special gaming state) to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. (Function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode with the MPU 112)
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (second) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. (Special game state) is provided,
If the determination result by the special information determining means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state, the process may shift to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state.
A launch suggestion means for suggesting to the player to launch a game ball toward the starting ball entry portion at least in the second gaming state.
In the game times executed in the second game state and the winning result, the number of the special information stored in the special information storage means has not reached the upper limit memorable by the special information storage means. In some cases, the gaming machine is provided with an emphasizing means for emphasizing the suggestion by the launch suggesting means.

In the configuration shown in the feature F2, the switching control mode is switched from the second switching mode to the first switching mode with the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, and it is difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball. Will be. In such a configuration, the more special information acquired → stored during the second gaming state and carried over from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the more advantageous the player. In the second gaming state, since the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the movement for the game rotation and the production performed during the game rotation, and the attention to the starting ball entry portion is focused. I think it will drop. Here, in the second game state, if the winning result is obtained, the player can shift to the first game state, so that the player's attention remains toward the production and the acquisition of special information is neglected. There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you should have obtained. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in the game times in which the winning result is obtained in the second game state, if the number of stored special information does not reach the upper limit, the suggestion by the launch suggestion means is given. Be emphasized. In this way, by urging the player to acquire the special information, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the shortage of the number of special information at the time of transition to the first gaming state. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

Feature F3. The number of consecutive times (for example, the number of consecutive villas) in which the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state and the winning result is obtained without shifting to the first gaming state is a specified number of times (for example, 4). When the number of times is reached, the first transition means (function of shifting to the third special gaming state by the limiter operation in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) to shift to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state.
When the winning result is obtained during the second gaming state and the continuous number of times the winning result is obtained without shifting to the first gaming state has not reached the specified number of times, the second after the end of the special gaming state. It is equipped with a second transition means (a function of shifting to the second special gaming state in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) to shift to the gaming state.
The emphasizing means is stored in the special information storage means in a situation where the game rotation operation of the game times in which the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result in the second game state is performed. It is characterized in that it has a means for emphasizing the suggestion by the suggestion means when the number of special information has reached the upper limit and the number of consecutive times including the winning result reaches the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or the feature F2.

In the configuration in which the number of consecutive times is controlled (so-called limiter) as shown in the feature F3, the player is forcibly shifted to the first gaming state when the specified number of times is reached, so that the player's willingness to play may decrease. At this time, if the player cannot enjoy the privilege that the player should originally obtain due to the lack of special information as shown in the feature F1 or the like, there is a concern that the player's willingness to play will be significantly reduced. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by emphasizing the suggestion by the launch suggestion means at least in the situation where the limiter can operate.

Feature F4. The emphasizing means is stored in the special information storage means in a situation where the game rotation operation of the game times in which the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result in the second game state is performed. It has a means for emphasizing the suggestion by the suggestion means when the number of special information has reached the upper limit and the number of consecutive times including the winning result does not reach the predetermined number of times.
As the emphasis mode by the emphasis means, a first emphasis mode (right-handed notification LV1) and a second emphasis mode (right-handed notification LV2) that are more conspicuous than the first emphasis mode are provided.
The emphasizing means sets the emphasizing mode of the suggestion by the suggesting means when the number of consecutive times reaches the specified number of times as the second emphasizing mode, and when the number of consecutive times does not reach the specified number of times, the emphasizing means by the suggesting means. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the emphasized mode of the suggestion is configured to be the first emphasized mode.

Since the second gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is likely to be directed to the production. Here, it is feared that the over-emphasis of the suggestion by the launch suggestion means described above may be a factor that increases the possibility that the suggestion gives the player the impression that it is troublesome. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the suggestion by the launch suggestion means is emphasized in the first emphasis mode when the limiter is not activated and in the second emphasis mode when the limiter is activated, a negative impression on the emphasis function is preferably given. Can be wiped off.

Feature F5. In the second gaming state, emphasis by the emphasis means is not possible from the start of the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means until a predetermined period (predetermined grace period) elapses. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F4, which is characterized by being configured.

At the start of the game round (game round operation), the special information (hold) stored in the special information storage means is reduced. That is, the number of special information stored is always less than the upper limit. It is feared that emphasizing the suggestion each time will cause the suggestion to be emphasized frequently, and will likely give the player the impression that it is bothersome. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by providing a grace period during which emphasis cannot be made after the start of the game round.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, which comprises a period-variable means for varying the length of the predetermined period.

According to the feature F6, a predetermined period (a period during which emphasis cannot be made) can be changed according to the situation of the game or the like. As a result, the emphasis function can be exerted according to the situation of the game and the like. For example, when the execution period of the game rotation operation is short, the predetermined period may be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the emphasis period from becoming excessively short and the emphasis function not being exerted well.

Feature F7. The period variable means has means for shortening the predetermined period when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is less than a predetermined number when the game rotation operation is started. The gaming machine according to feature F6, which is characterized in that it is used.

According to the feature F7, it is possible to preferably suppress the shortage of time for acquiring the special information by configuring so that the suggestion is emphasized earlier as the amount of special information stored at the start of the game is less. ..

Feature F8. In a situation where the suggestion is emphasized by the emphasis means, when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit, the emphasis of the suggestion is canceled. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F7.

When the emphasis function shown in the feature F1 or the like is provided, as shown in this feature, the emphasis is released when the number of special information reaches the upper limit after the suggestion emphasis, so that a practically preferable configuration can be obtained. realizable.

Feature F9. The emphasis means is the special information storage means in a situation where the game rotation operation of the game times in which the determination result by the special information determination means is a non-winning result (disappearance result) is performed in the second game state. One of the feature F1 to the feature F8, which comprises means for emphasizing the suggestion by the suggestion means in a part when the number of special information stored in the above does not reach the upper limit. The game machine described in one.

In the configuration shown in the feature F1 or the like, there is a concern that the effect of other effects executed during the game will be reduced because the emphasis is generated = the winning result. Therefore, even in the game times that result in non-winning, the suggestion can be emphasized in some cases when the number of special information is insufficient. Both cases occur when the winning result is obtained. And, even if such fake emphasis is performed, the player does not suffer any disadvantage. For the above reasons, it is considered that the configuration shown in this feature is a preferable configuration for improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F10. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a special game state transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. The function of executing the transition process to the open / close execution mode by the MPU 112 of 81) and the determination result by the special information determination means become the winning result (special hit result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game times control means As a notification result corresponding to the winning result, the game state is changed from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the end of the game rotation operation. The first special game state transition means (a function of executing the process for transition to the special hit game state by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
If the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state, the configuration is such that the transition to the first gaming state can be performed after the end of the special gaming state (presence or absence of limiter operation). And
When shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the special information stored by the special information storage means during the second gaming state is the special information stored from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. It is structured so that the more special information that is carried over to, the more advantageous it is to the player.
In the launch suggestion means (for example, the symbol display device 41 or the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82) that suggests the launch of the game ball toward the starting ball entry portion to the player when the second gaming state is reached. (Function to execute processing for right-handed notification) and
In the game times executed in the second game state and the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result, the number of the special information stored in the special information storage means is determined by the special information storage means. It is provided with an emphasizing means (a function of executing a right-handed notification emphasizing process in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82) when the memorable upper limit is not reached. A game machine featuring.

In the configuration shown in the feature F10, when shifting from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the special information acquired and stored during the second gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. It is configured so that the more special information that is carried over, the more advantageous it is to the player. Here, in the second gaming state, when the winning result is obtained, the transition to the first gaming state is performed. In the second gaming state, since the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the movement for the game rotation and the production performed during the game rotation, and the attention to the starting ball entry portion is focused. I think it will drop. Here, in the second game state, if the winning result is obtained, the player can shift to the first game state, so that the player's attention remains toward the production and the acquisition of special information is neglected. There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you should have obtained. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in the game times in which the winning result is obtained in the second game state, if the number of stored special information does not reach the upper limit, the suggestion by the launch suggestion means is given. Be emphasized. In this way, by urging the player to acquire the special information, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the shortage of the number of special information at the time of transition to the first gaming state. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

Features F11. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. To the first special game state transition means (to the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. (A function to execute the process for transitioning to the special hit game state) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. Function to execute the process for transition to the jackpot game state with MPU112) and
A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (first) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. (Special game state) is provided,
If the determination result by the special information determining means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state, the process may shift to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state.
A launch suggestion means for suggesting to the player to launch a game ball toward the starting ball entry portion at least in the second gaming state.
In the game times executed in the second game state and the winning result, the number of the special information stored in the special information storage means has not reached the upper limit memorable by the special information storage means. In some cases, the gaming machine is provided with an emphasizing means for emphasizing the suggestion by the launch suggesting means.

In the configuration shown in the feature F11, the switching control mode is switched from the second switching mode to the first switching mode with the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, and it is difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball. Will be. In such a configuration, the more special information acquired → stored during the second gaming state and carried over from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the more advantageous the player. In the second gaming state, since the gaming state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the movement for the game rotation and the production performed during the game rotation, and the attention to the starting ball entry portion is focused. I think it will drop. Here, in the second game state, if the winning result is obtained, the player can shift to the first game state, so that the player's attention remains toward the production and the acquisition of special information is neglected. There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you should have obtained. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in the game times in which the winning result is obtained in the second game state, if the number of stored special information does not reach the upper limit, the suggestion by the launch suggestion means is given. Be emphasized. In this way, by urging the player to acquire the special information, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the shortage of the number of special information at the time of transition to the first gaming state. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

The technical ideas shown in the features F1 to F9 may be applied to the features F10 to F11.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to E to the features F1 to F11 described in detail above.

<Characteristic G group>
The following feature G group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in a game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. Regarding the background technology of "(for example, see Patent Document 1)", there is an invention that "in the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game." It was made with the problem to be solved.

Features G1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Based on this, a special game state transition means (main control device) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state (for example, a normal game state or a special game state) to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. The 81 MPU 112 has a function to execute the transition process to the open / close execution mode).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The number of special information stored in the special information storage means can be stored in the special information storage means under the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that results in the winning is performed in the second game state. When the upper limit (4) is reached, a special suggestion is given to the player to suggest to the player that the game shifts to the special game state before the game rotation operation is completed as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by having a suggestion means (a function of displaying "V release preparing" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41).

According to the feature G1, in the game times in which the winning result is obtained during the second game state, the number of special information reaches the upper limit during the game times operation (before the game times operation is completed), so that the special game state A special suggestion will be made to move to. By giving a relationship between the number of special information and the special suggestion in this way, it is possible to encourage the player who expects the special suggestion to aim at reaching the upper limit. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the special suggestion is configured to be continued at least until the game rounding operation of the game round in which the special suggestion is started is completed.

As shown in this feature, by adopting a configuration in which the special suggestion is continued until the game rounding operation of the corresponding game round is completed, it is possible to suitably suppress the oversight of the special suggestion.

Feature G3. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game rotation operation, the game rotation operation of the game times in which the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result is performed in the second game state. The feature G1 or feature G2 is characterized in that the special suggestion is not performed even if the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit under such circumstances. The game machine described.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, for example, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a special suggestion immediately before the end of the game rotation operation. This is preferable in order to prevent the player from being confused by the mixture of the notification of the winning result and the special suggestion.

Feature G4. When the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state and the number of consecutive winning results reaches the specified number without shifting to the first gaming state, the special The first transition means (function of shifting to the third special gaming state by the limiter operation in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) to shift to the first gaming state after the game state ends.
When the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state and the number of consecutive winning results without shifting to the first gaming state does not reach the specified number of times. It is provided with a second transition means (a function of shifting to the second special gaming state in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state.
As the suggestion mode of the special suggestion, a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode having different modes are provided.
The suggestion means
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit in the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that is the winning result is performed in the second game state. When the number of consecutive times including the winning result reaches the specified number of times, the means for giving the special suggestion in the first suggestion mode and
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit in the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that is the winning result is performed in the second game state. The feature G1 to the feature G3 is characterized by having a means for giving the special suggestion in the first suggestion mode when the continuous number of times including the winning result does not reach the specified number of times. The gaming machine described in one.

In a configuration in which the number of consecutive times is controlled by a specified number of times (so-called limiter), the mode of the special suggestion is different depending on the presence or absence of the limiter operation, so that the flow of the game after that can be easily estimated from the special suggestion. This is preferable in order to alleviate the harmful effects (the game state changes one after another without the player's understanding catching up) that occurs in speeding up the game progress.

Feature G5. The game turn control means has a period determining means for determining the operation period of the game turn operation for each game turn.
A production execution means for executing an effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the game rotation operation is performed is provided.
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, there is a special effect (special variation display) in which a predetermined effect (unit effect) configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is executed a plurality of times. It is provided,
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit during the predetermined effect, the suggestion means starts the special suggestion until the timing when the subsequent predetermined effect is started. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G4, which is characterized in that the game is delayed.

If the number of special information reaches the upper limit during the execution of the predetermined effect, the special suggestion is started at the start timing of the next predetermined effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of oversight of the predetermined effect due to the player's attention being deviated from the predetermined effect due to the special suggestion.

Feature G6. The suggestion means can continue the special suggestion over a plurality of effect execution periods of the predetermined effect, and the suggestion mode of the special suggestion shifts the suggestion mode of the special suggestion from the previous predetermined effect to the next predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature G5, which is characterized by having a changing means for changing at the time.

As shown in the feature G6, if the suggestion mode of the special suggestion is changed according to the transition of the predetermined effect, the cooperation between the predetermined effect and the special suggestion can be strengthened.

Feature G7. The effect executing means includes a variable display means (design display device 41) for variably displaying a pattern on a display screen (display screen G), and as a predetermined effect, a variable display for variably displaying a pattern on the display screen. Including the stop display that stops and displays the pattern through the variable display.
The suggestion means is configured to give the special suggestion on the display screen, and is characterized by having means for reducing the display range in which the special suggestion is executed in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to the feature G5 or the feature G6.

When the display screen is shared between the predetermined effect and the special suggestion, the predetermined effect and the special suggestion are preferably combined by reducing the display range of the special suggestion according to the progress of the predetermined effect from the start of the special suggestion. Can coexist. This is preferable in strengthening the cooperation between the predetermined effect and the special suggestion.

Feature G8. In the suggestion means, the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is set to the upper limit in the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that is the winning result is performed in the second game state. When it reaches, one of the features G5 and the feature G7 is characterized in that it is configured to determine whether or not to give the special suggestion based on the remaining number of times of the predetermined effect in the game times. Described gaming machine.

As shown in the feature G5 and the like, in the configuration in which the predetermined effect and the special suggestion are linked, a certain period of time is required for the linking function to be effectively exerted. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the propriety of the special suggestion is determined according to the remaining number of times of the predetermined effect when the upper limit is reached, it is possible to preferably suppress the above-mentioned cooperation function from being exerted well.

Feature G9. The suggestion means is at the timing when the number of the special information reaches the upper limit (4) in the situation where the game turn operation of the game turn that is the winning result is performed in the second game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G1 to the feature G4, which is configured to start the special suggestion.

According to the configuration shown in the feature G9, when the number of special information reaches the upper limit, the special suggestion is promptly started, so that wasteful investment can be suitably suppressed.

In particular, according to the combination with the feature G2 (a configuration in which the special suggestion is continued until the game round operation is completed), the execution period of the special suggestion becomes longer as the special information reaches the upper limit at an earlier timing after the start of the game round. , It is possible to preferably urge the player who wants to enjoy the special suggestion to launch the game ball.

Feature G10. A first state (open state) that allows entry into the starting ball entry section and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. Variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched to (state) and
It is provided with a switching control means (a function of executing a process for electric service support by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state.
As the switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode in which the switching mode to the first state is more advantageous than the first switching mode are advantageous to the player. There is a mode (high frequency support mode),
Any of the features G1 to G9, wherein the switching control mode in the first gaming state is the first switching mode, and the switching control mode in the second gaming state is the second switching mode. The game machine described in one.

The second gaming state corresponds to the second switching mode, which facilitates entry into the starting entry section. By applying the technical idea shown in the feature G1 etc. to such a configuration, the above-mentioned hurdle to reach the upper limit can be lowered, and the chance of generating a special suggestion will greatly differ depending on the skill level of the player. It can be suitably suppressed.

Feature G11. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. To the first special game state transition means (to the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state. (A function to execute the process for transitioning to the special hit game state) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V prize) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, the second special gaming state transition means (main control device 81) for transitioning from the first special gaming state to the second special gaming state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The number of special information stored in the special information storage means can be stored in the special information storage means under the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that results in the winning is performed in the second game state. When the upper limit (4) is reached, a special suggestion is given to the player to suggest to the player that the game shifts to the special game state before the game rotation operation is completed as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by having a suggestion means (a function of displaying "V release preparing" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41).

According to the feature G11, in the game times in which the winning result is obtained during the second game state, the number of special information reaches the upper limit during the game times operation (before the game times operation is completed), so that the special game state A special suggestion will be made to move to. By giving a relationship between the number of special information and the special suggestion in this way, it is possible to encourage the player who expects the special suggestion to aim at reaching the upper limit. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G12. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) into which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball into the game area. It ’s a game machine
A starting ball entry portion (second operating port 34) provided in the game area and
Information acquisition means (a function of acquiring hold information by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on the entry into the starting ball entry unit, and
Special information storage means (a function of storing reserved information in the RAM 114 of the main control device 81) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
The special information determination means (in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (for example, the winning information of the jackpot or the special hit). Function to execute pass / fail judgment processing, etc.) and
The game rotation operation (display of variation in the pattern) is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. As one of the game times, the end of the game turn operation is regarded as one time, and the notification means (notifying means) so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. A game rotation control means (a function of executing display control of the operation port display unit BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for controlling the operation port display unit BS), and
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the first result which is the winning result (special hit result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game rotation control means uses the game rotation control means as a notification result corresponding to the first result. The first special game state transition means (mainly) that shifts the game state from the predetermined game state to the first special game state (special hit game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the end of the operation. The function of executing the process for shifting to the special hit game state by the MPU 112 of the control device 81) and
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, or the determination result by the special information determination means is the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information. As a result, when the game rotation operation is completed as a notification result corresponding to the second result by the game rotation control means, the second special game state transition means (main control device 81) shifts to the second special game state. The MPU 112 has a function to execute the process for transitioning to the jackpot game state).
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The number of special information stored in the special information storage means can be stored in the special information storage means under the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that results in the winning is performed in the second game state. When the upper limit (4) is reached, a special suggestion is given to the player to suggest to the player that the game shifts to the special game state before the game rotation operation is completed as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by having a suggestion means (a function of displaying "V release preparing" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41).

According to the feature G12, in the game times in which the winning result is obtained during the second game state, the number of special information reaches the upper limit during the game times operation (before the game times operation is completed), so that the special game state A special suggestion will be made to move to. By giving a relationship between the number of special information and the special suggestion in this way, it is possible to encourage the player who expects the special suggestion to aim at reaching the upper limit. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature G1 to feature G10 may be applied to feature G11 to feature G12.

It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features A to G to the features G1 to G12 described in detail above.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means (launching handle 60) operated by a player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launched game ball. A ball passage (guidance rail 54) for guiding the player to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area are provided, and a predetermined passing portion (a predetermined passing portion) among the game parts (nail, etc.) A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a general winning opening 31 or the like).

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A game machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Belt-type game machine using a ball: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row in the final stop, the symbol variation is started and stopped due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. (Game, etc.) is generated, and further, a throwing device provided with a ball saucer and a throwing device for taking in a game ball from the ball saucer and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball saucer is provided. A game machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the game ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 24 ... Game board, 32A ... 1st variable winning device, 32B ... 2nd variable winning device, 33 ... 1st operating port, 34 ... 2nd operating port, 34b ... Electric accessory, 35 ... Through gate, 41 ... Design display device, 43 ... Operation port display unit, 44 ... Through gate display unit, 53 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 60 ... Launch handle, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Notification / production Control device, 112 ... MPU, 113 ... ROM, 114 ... RAM, 212 ... Display control device, 242 ... MPU, 356 ... V winning area, AE ... Execution area, AS ... Display unit for the first operating port, BS ... Second Display unit for operating port, G ... Display screen, PE ... Game area, RE ... Holding area, Ra ... Holding area for first operating port, Rb ... Holding area for second operating port.

Claims (6)

It is a game machine provided with a game board in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is formed, and a game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area.
The starting ball entry portion provided in the game area and
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the entry into the starting ball entry section, and
A special information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a special information storage means.
A special information determination means for sequentially determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information,
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the special information determination means or based on the determination made by the special information determination means, and the game rotation operation is performed as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. Is completed as one game time, and the game time control means for controlling the notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. When,
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result corresponding to the special determination information, and the gaming state is based on the fact that the game rotation operation is terminated as the notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game rotation control means. Is provided with a special game state transition means for shifting from a predetermined game state to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state are provided.
The number of special information stored in the special information storage means can be stored in the special information storage means under the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that results in the winning is performed in the second game state. When the upper limit is reached, as a notification result corresponding to the winning result, a suggestion means for suggesting to the player that the player will shift to the special gaming state before the game rotation operation is completed is provided. A game machine characterized by being. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the special suggestion is configured to be continued at least until the game rounding operation of the game round in which the special suggestion is started is completed. When a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game rotation operation, the game rotation operation of the game times in which the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result is performed in the second game state. Claim 1 or claim is characterized in that the special suggestion is not made even if the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit under such circumstances. The gaming machine according to 2. When the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state and the number of consecutive winning results reaches the specified number without shifting to the first gaming state, the special The first transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state after the end of the gaming state, and
When the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result during the second gaming state and the number of consecutive winning results without shifting to the first gaming state does not reach the specified number of times. It is provided with a second transition means for transitioning to the second gaming state via a special gaming state.
As the suggestion mode of the special suggestion, a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode having different modes are provided.
The suggestion means
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit in the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that is the winning result is performed in the second game state. When the number of consecutive times including the winning result reaches the specified number of times, the means for giving the special suggestion in the first suggestion mode and
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit in the situation where the game rotation operation of the game times that results in the winning is performed in the second game state. 1 to 3, wherein the special suggestion is given in the first suggestion mode when the continuous number of times including the winning result does not reach the specified number of times. The gaming machine described in any one of. The game turn control means has a period determining means for determining the operation period of the game turn operation for each game turn.
A production execution means for executing an effect in parallel with the game rotation operation when the game rotation operation is performed is provided.
As one of the effects executed by the effect executing means, a special effect is provided in which a predetermined effect configured so that the effect execution period is shorter than the operation period is executed a plurality of times.
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit during the predetermined effect, the suggestion means starts the special suggestion until the timing when the subsequent predetermined effect is started. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is configured to delay. The suggestion means can continue the special suggestion over a plurality of effect execution periods of the predetermined effect, and the suggestion mode of the special suggestion shifts from the previous predetermined effect to the next predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to claim 5, further comprising a changing means for changing at the time.

Images